JP6640300B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin and operates a start lever, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective surfaces start rotating, and a stop button is operated. Then, there are known gaming machines called so-called pachi-slot machines, in which the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped and a privilege is given according to a combination of symbols displayed as a result.

  In such a gaming machine, when an operation on a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”) is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as “internal winning”). When a stop button detects an operation to a stop button (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation") by a stop switch, the stepping motor is driven. Is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, during the advantageous gaming state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player, the right of this advantageous gaming state is further provided (for example, the execution of the addition lottery of the set number is indicated. Hereinafter, this is referred to as “addition”). A game machine is known (Patent Document 1).

  Specifically, even during the advantageous gaming state (for example, ART), the additional lottery based on the internal winning combination is executed for each unit game, and when the additional lottery is won, the set number of the won is added. In addition, by continuing the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to always have a feeling of expectation regarding addition during the advantageous gaming state.

JP 2013-17520 A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature 1, additional lottery based on the internal winning combination is executed for each unit game, that is, an additional lottery opportunity based on the start operation of the player is given only once. Therefore, with regard to the addition in the advantageous game state, there has been a demand for further improvement in interest.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving a sense of expectation of addition in an advantageous gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a start operation (for example, start) by a player. Start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 16S) for detecting the operation on the lever 16 and stop operation detecting means (for example, for operating the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) by the player. , A stop switch 17S) and a symbol variation start unit (for example, a reel rotation start process and a reel control by the main CPU 51) for starting a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on the detection of the start operation. Processing) and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination) for determining an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation. The internal lottery process by the PU 51) and, based on the detection of the stop operation, stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stopping means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 51), A profit providing means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) for providing a corresponding profit, and an advantageous game state control means for controlling to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. in the preferred gaming state, when the first winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means is determined as the internal winning combination, the advantageous Comprising a continuous grant means capable entitled to continue the skill state, and the advantageous gaming state, when the second roles is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means, the specific symbol the combination is displayed, a certain benefits can broadcast information stop operation that would be granted a gaming state of payout of a certain number of game media by the profit applying means, said first roles are the specific The combination of symbols can be displayed, but the internal profit is an internal winning combination in which the specific profit is not provided by the profit providing means and the profit of the replay is provided, and the internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state. When the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, when the advantageous gaming state is not the predetermined state, information of a stop operation for displaying the specific symbol combination can be notified. It is characterized by.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state, the gaming machine may be configured to perform the processing when the advantageous gaming state is the predetermined state. It is characterized in that information of a stop operation for not displaying a specific symbol combination can be notified.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the internal winning combination determining means can further determine the third winning combination as an internal winning combination, and the continuation right granting means determines the third winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. Is determined as an internal winning combination, the right to continue the advantageous gaming state cannot be granted, and the third combination can display the specific symbol combination. It is an internal winning combination in which a specific profit is not given and a profit of a replay is given.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the sense of expectation of addition in the advantageous game state.

It is a figure showing the functional flow of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a front view of a state of a front panel in a state where a movable part is in an initial position in a pachislo machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a state of a front panel in a state where a movable part is in a production position in a pachislo machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a front panel of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine with a front door opened. It is a block diagram showing the whole composition of a circuit with which a pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention is provided. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a sub control circuit in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table in the pachislo machine concerning embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table concerning the bonus combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table concerning the replay combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table concerning the small combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table concerning the small combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table for general gaming states stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing the RB gaming state internal lottery table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing a bonus internal winning combination determination table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing the relation between the stop operation order for the internal winning combination and the winning combination in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the pushing order small combination in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention, (b) shows the structure of the pushing order small combination in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the push order small combination when it is not applied. It is a figure showing the internal winning combination storing area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure showing the display combination storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure showing the symbol code storage area allocated to the in-RAM. It is a figure showing a carryover combination storage area allocated to the in RAM. It is a figure showing a game state flag storage area allocated to the main RAM. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an operation stop button storage area allocated to a main RAM. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a pressing order storage area allocated to a main RAM. It is a figure showing an effect game state storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure showing the reel action lottery table for main CZ states memorized by the main ROM. (A) is a pseudo game number lottery table stored in the main ROM, (b) is a pseudo internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM, (c) is a high-accuracy transition lottery table stored in the main ROM, ( FIG. 4D is a diagram showing a highly secure failure game number lottery table stored in the main ROM, and FIG. 4E is a diagram showing a pseudo probable change state end lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure showing the reel action lottery table for fixed combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing the mode suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure showing the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the example of estimation of the number of remaining games by the remaining game number suggestion effect in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an AT point addition lottery table memorized by sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the AT number addition lottery table in the addition state memorize | stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the point addition lottery table in an added state memorize | stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure showing an example of data for reel effect selection stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing an example of the excitation output table for production stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect symbol position search data stored in the main ROM. It is an outline figure showing a flow of a game in a pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the pachislo machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 43 is a flowchart showing power-on processing executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 42. 43 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. 43 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. 43 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a lottery process during a pseudo probability change state executed in the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 46. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process during a normal game performed in the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. 50 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game process executed in the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49. 43 is a flowchart showing a state management process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. 52 is a flowchart showing a state management process during AT executed in the state management process shown in FIG. 51. 52 is a flowchart showing an external signal output management process executed in the state management process shown in FIG. 51. 43 is a flowchart showing a game end lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process by control of the main CPU which comprises the pachislo machine concerning embodiment of this invention. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing communication data transmission processing executed in the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. 58 is a flowchart showing a reel effect control process executed in the reel control process shown in FIG. 58. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a reel effect adjustment output process executed in the reel effect control process illustrated in FIG. 59. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a reel effect adjustment output process executed in the reel effect control process illustrated in FIG. 59. 62 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol position updating process executed in the reel effect adjustment output process shown in FIGS. 60 and 61. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU which comprises the pachislo machine concerning embodiment of this invention. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a sound control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task started in the mother task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. 67 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 66. 67 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process executed in the command analysis process shown in FIG. 67. Fig. 69 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a start command, which is executed in the effect content determination process shown in Fig. 68. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an additional state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a pseudo probable change state process executed in the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a normal in-game process executed in the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 69. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an AT entry process executed in the normal game process shown in FIG. 72 and the lock command reception process shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a lock command receiving process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a prize-winning operation command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68. 43 is a flowchart showing lock lottery processing executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 42 according to another embodiment of the present invention. 43 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42 according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the stop operation continuation suggestion effect which concerns on other embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine, which is a specific example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described with reference to the drawings. First, a functional flow of a pachislo machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

[Functional flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, a pachislot machine (for example, a pachislot machine 1 to be described later) is predetermined when a medal is inserted by a player and a start lever (for example, a start lever 16 to be described later) is operated. One value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from a random number in a numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 51 to be described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determination means determines a predetermined combination among a plurality of combinations based on detection of a start operation of a unit game with respect to a start lever by a start switch (for example, a start switch 16S described later) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). The internal winning combination is determined based on the winning probability.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed along the pay line is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which a bonus such as medal payout, replay (replay) operation, and bonus operation are given to a player, and other so-called “losing”. Such a thing is provided.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine can perform control for stopping the progress of the game. Such control is called "freeze" or "lock". For convenience, the control for stopping the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is referred to as "game start lock", and the control for stopping the progress of the game executed at the end of the game as "lock at the end of the game". Call. In other words, "game start lock" means that an operation on a stop button (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R described later) is not effective during a predetermined period after the start lever is operated. In a sense, the progress of the game is stopped, and the "lock at the end of the game" is an operation on the bet button or an operation on the start lever for a predetermined period after the stop button is operated. Is a control in which the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that is not effective. Of course, the trigger of “freeze” or “lock” is not limited to the above, and for example, after the start lever 16 is operated and one of the stop buttons is operated, after a predetermined period, The control may be performed such that the operation is not effective.

  In addition, the internal winning combination determination means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines whether to perform “freeze” or “lock” instead of or together with the internal winning combination. Is also good. At this time, a plurality of random numbers are extracted, an internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random numbers, and “freeze” or “lock” is performed based on the other random number. It may be determined whether or not.

  Subsequently, after a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described later) are rotated, when a stop button is pressed by a player, reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 62 described later). The later-described stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) perform control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed.

  Here, in the pachislo machine, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the relevant reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as the “number of sliding pieces”. When the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is determined to be four symbols, and when the prescribed period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is determined to be one symbol. The maximum number of sliding pieces is not limited to these, and can be set as appropriate.

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the symbol combination related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means uses the above specified time to make the winning combination (hereinafter, referred to as a winning line) in which the symbol combination is activated. The rotation of the reel is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible along the "effective line".

  On the other hand, for a combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the reels are set within the maximum number of sliding pieces so as not to be displayed along the active line by using the specified time. Stop the rotation of.

  In addition, when the determined internal winning combination changes the combination of symbols displayed according to the predetermined stop operation order, the reel stop control means also changes the predetermined stop operation order. With reference to this, control is performed to stop the rotation of the relevant reel.

  When the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped in this way, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line is related to winning.

  That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the game is related to a prize, a privilege such as payout of a medal is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine.

  In the present embodiment, the first reel stop operation performed when all reels are rotating is the first stop operation, the second reel stop operation is the second stop operation, and the second reel stop operation is the second stop operation. The stop operation performed after the two stop operations is referred to as a third stop operation.

  In the pachislot machine, various effects are performed by the effect executing means (notifying means) in the above-described series of flows. These effects are performed by displaying an image using a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later), outputting light using a lamp (for example, a lamp group 21 described later), and speakers (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later). , Or a combination of these.

  When the start lever is operated by the player, in addition to the random number value used to determine the internal winning combination, other lottery processing, for example, a random number value for effect (hereinafter, random value value for effect) is extracted. You.

  When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means (for example, a sub CPU 81 described later) randomly determines the effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the effect contents are determined, the effect execution means is linked with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, or when the determination of the presence or absence of a prize is performed. And perform the production.

  In this way, in the pachislot machine, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of symbols to be aimed). Provided to improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 3 is a front panel of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention in which movable parts are at an initial position. FIG. 4 is a front view of the front panel in a state where the movable part is in the rendering position in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a front panel of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 6 shows an internal structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view in the state where the door was opened.

  The pachislot machine 1 is a game machine that uses a game medium such as a coin, a medal, a game ball, a token, or the like, and a card or the like that stores information of a game value given or given to a player. However, the following description will be made assuming that medals are used.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a that is a main body that houses reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a concave portion to which a hand is put when carrying the pachislot machine 1.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3) showing a specific example of the display device, and a waist panel 12. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 3, inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a cylindrical reel body and a light-transmissive sheet material mounted on a peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality (for example, 21) of symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to an upper part of the door body 9 and performs an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R for displaying symbols drawn on three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, an image is displayed using the entire display unit 11a including the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, and an effect is performed.

  The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions that overlap the three reel arrangement areas when viewed from the front (the player side), and are located closer to the three reels (the player side). Is provided. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R via the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are arranged continuously among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows is stopped. The size is set so that three symbols can be displayed. That is, the upper, middle, and lower regions are provided for each reel in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, and one symbol is displayed in each region. In the present embodiment, a line (center line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning line for determining whether or not a winning is achieved. Define.

  The front panel 10 is attached to an upper part of the door body 9 and is set to have a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is disposed so as to overlap the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and has a decorative frame 101 having a panel opening 101a for exposing the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and covers the front surface of the decorative frame 101. And a protective cover 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 5).

  As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative frame 101 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a panel opening 101a. The decorative frame 101 has an upper frame 111, a lower frame 112, a left frame 113, and a right frame 114. The decorative frame 101 is formed so that a pattern is formed on the surface by mixing a resin with a mixture and performing injection molding. In order to form a pattern on the surface by such molding, for example, the position of the injection gate may be adjusted.

  The upper frame portion 111 is provided with a plurality of upper engagement holes 111a that open forward. The openings of the plurality of upper engagement holes 111a are each formed in a horizontally long rectangle. An upper engagement piece 126 of the protective cover 102 described later is inserted into the plurality of upper engagement holes 111a.

  Further, the left frame portion 113 is provided with a plurality of left engaging holes 113a opening forward, and the right frame portion 114 is provided with a plurality of right engaging holes 114a opening forward. The openings of the plurality of left engagement holes 113a and right engagement holes 114a are each formed in a vertically long rectangle. A left engagement piece 127 and a right engagement piece 128 of the protective cover 102 described later are inserted into the plurality of left engagement holes 113a and right engagement holes 114a.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the protective cover 102 is made of a synthetic resin having a light-transmitting property, and includes a front surface 121 facing forward, an upper surface 122 facing upward, and a lower surface 123 facing downward. , And has a left side surface portion 124 and a right side surface portion 125 facing sideways.

  In the lower part of the front part 121, switch notches 121a and 121b for exposing effect switches 22L and 22R to be described later are formed. These switch notches 121a, 121b are formed in an arc shape corresponding to the outer shape of the effect switches 22L, 22R.

  A plurality of upper engagement pieces 126 are provided on the end surface of the upper surface portion 122. The plurality of upper engagement pieces 126 are formed in a flat plate shape having a plane substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction, and have flexibility. Further, on the upper surface (one plane) of the plurality of upper engagement pieces 126, an engagement protrusion 126a is provided.

  When the upper engaging pieces 126 are inserted into the plurality of upper engaging holes 111a of the decorative frame 101, the engaging ridges 126a engage with the upper frame 111 of the decorative frame 101, and the protective cover 102 comes off the decorative frame 101. Can not be.

  The left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 of the protective cover 102 are continuous with the front surface portion 121 at an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction. Thus, the left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 have a protruding piece 124A and a protruding piece 125A that protrude forward from the front surface portion 121. The front end faces of the left side face part 124 and the right side face part 125 are end faces on the protruding piece 124A and protruding piece 125A side, and are formed in an arc shape such that the central part protrudes most forward.

  In addition, a plurality of right engagement pieces 128 are provided on an end surface of the right side surface portion 125 facing rearward. The left side portion 124 is provided with a plurality of left engagement pieces 127 (not shown), like the right engagement piece 128 in the right side portion 125. The plurality of left engagement pieces 127 and the plurality of right engagement pieces 128 are formed in a flat plate shape having a plane substantially orthogonal to the left-right direction.

  The right side part 125 is provided with a decoration part 125a. The decorative portion 125a is formed by subjecting a part of the outer surface of the right side surface portion 125 to texturing. The decorative portion 125a emits light by receiving light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided at the back of the right engagement hole 114a of the decorative frame 101. In the right side portion 125, a region where the decorative portion 125a is not provided is a light transmitting portion that transmits light.

  Further, a decorative portion (not shown) similar to the decorative portion 125a of the right side portion 125 is provided on the left side portion 124. A decorative portion (not shown) of the left side surface portion 124 emits light by receiving light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided in the interior of the left engaging hole 113a of the decorative frame 101. In the left side surface portion 124, a region where the decorative portion is not provided is a light transmitting portion that transmits light.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the decorative frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and effect switches 22 </ b> L and 22 </ b> R. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, the lamps 21a and 21b in FIG. The lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and turns on and off light in a pattern corresponding to the effect contents. The effect switches 22L and 22R are provided on the left and right sides of the decorative frame 101, respectively.

  Further, a center movable unit 105, a left movable unit 106, and a right movable unit 107 are attached to the decorative frame 101.

  The central movable unit 105 is disposed at the upper central portion in the decorative frame 101 and has a movable part 309 described later. For example, when a specific effect is performed, the central movable unit 105 rotates the movable component 309 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the left-right direction, and from below the decorative cover 364. Lower it. Thereby, the movable part 309 moves to the effect position (see FIG. 4) covering a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the movable part 309 is composed of a character part 323, an arch cover 324, and a light emitting display part 325. When the movable part 309 is arranged at the production position, the character part 323, the arch cover 324 is formed. , The light emitting display unit 325 becomes visible from the front of the pachislot machine 1. Although not shown, the arch cover 324 and the light-emitting display portion 325 are individually formed with transmission regions for transmitting light emitted from LEDs (not shown) provided on their back surfaces. I have. In particular, the light-emitting display portion 325 has a plurality of (for example, three) transmission regions formed in parallel so that a plurality of stages (for example, three stages) of lighting display can be performed stepwise.

  The left movable unit 106 is arranged on the left side in the decorative frame 101 and has a left door 188 described later. Further, the right movable unit 107 is disposed on the right side in the decorative frame 101 and has a right door 189 described later. The left door 188 and the right door 189 are formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape having an appropriate thickness, and one plane faces forward in the initial position.

  For example, when a predetermined effect is performed, the left movable unit 106 rotates the left door 188 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the vertical direction. In addition, for example, when a predetermined effect is performed, the right movable unit 107 rotates the right door 189 at the initial position about an axis extending in the vertical direction. In the pachislo machine 1, when a predetermined effect is performed, either one of the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated, or both the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a pedestal portion 13 is formed on the waist panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 is provided with various devices (medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15A, 1BET button 15B, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, and settlement button 18) to be operated by the player. ing.

  The medal slot 14 is provided for receiving a medal dropped by the player into the pachislot machine 1 from outside. The medals received from the medal insertion slot 14 are used in one game with a predetermined number (for example, three) as an upper limit, and a portion exceeding the predetermined number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (so-called credit). function).

  The MAX bet button 15A and the 1-BET button 15B are provided for determining the number of medals deposited in the pachislot machine 1 to be used in one game. The settlement button 18 is provided to pull out (discharge) medals stored in the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 7) composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 6 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits). Digital display.

  A medal payout port 24, a medal tray 25, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided below the door body 9. The medal payout exit 24 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33 described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout exit 24. The speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the cabinet 2a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one opening on the front side. A main board 31 that constitutes a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 7) described later is provided in an upper part in the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit for controlling main operations of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1 and a flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of presence / absence of winning, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in a central portion in the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 6, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R in FIG. 7) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. .

  A medal dispensing device 33 (hereinafter, referred to as a hopper 33) is provided at a lower portion in the cabinet 2a, and is capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging the medals one by one. A power supply device 4 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1 is provided on one side (left side in the example shown in FIG. 6) of the hopper 33 in the cabinet 2a. .

  A sub-board 32 that constitutes a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 7 and 8), which will be described later, is provided at an upper portion on the back side (the part opposite to the display screen side) of the front door 2b. The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Further, a selector 35 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of a medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2) are appropriate. Guide to 33. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 7) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on a path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

[Configuration of circuit included in pachislot machine]
Next, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an overall configuration of a circuit provided in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 shows an internal configuration of a sub control circuit in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram. The pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control circuit 41, a sub-control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these.

<Main control circuit>
The main control circuit 41 is mainly constituted by a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores a control program for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. . The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  The main CPU 51 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 51 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches, sensors, and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R.

  The stop switch 17S detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 16S detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 18S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player.

  The medal sensor 35S detects that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 has passed through the selector 35. The bet switch 15S detects that a bet button (the MAX bet button 15A or the 1-BET button 15B) has been pressed by the player.

  Further, peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 50 include three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided respectively for the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to a corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a fixed angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel, and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, thereby determining the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, the number of reel symbols. Just rotated or not).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Each time a pulse counter outputs a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 17 times) required for rotation of one symbol, the value of a symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to “ 1 "is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, the number of symbols that have been rotated since the reel index was detected is managed. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  The display drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the medal detection performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether the number of medals discharged from the hopper 33 to the outside reaches a predetermined number of payouts. I do.

  Although not shown, an external centralized terminal board is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. The external central terminal board receives signals such as the number of medals to be inserted / paid out, the number of games, information on the presence or absence of bonus operation from the main control circuit 41, and displays these signals as the number of games or the number of bonus operations. It is output as an external signal to an external display or a host computer of a game arcade. The external display is installed, for example, above the pachislot machine 1, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, or notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

<Sub-control circuit>
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . The sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86, as shown in FIG. Further, the sub control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, an A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, a center movable unit drive circuit 96, a left movable unit drive circuit 97, a right movable A unit driving circuit 98 and a rotating lamp driving circuit 99 are included.

  The sub CPU 81 controls output of video, sound, and light according to a control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in response to a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub-ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, the extraction of effect random numbers, determination of effect contents (effect data), and An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling image display by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp group 21, a speaker Programs such as a voice control task for controlling the output of sound by the 20L and 20R are included.

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data relating to video creation, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects. And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the sub control circuit 42 includes a liquid crystal display device 11, speakers 20L and 20R, a lamp group 21, a central movable unit 105, a left movable unit 106, a right movable unit 107, and a rotating light 543. And other peripheral devices are connected. That is, the operations of these peripheral devices are controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data specified by the contents of the effect. Is displayed.

  Further, the sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the A / D converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM through the speakers 20L and 20R according to sound data specified by the effect contents. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 according to the lamp data designated by the effect contents.

  The sub CPU 81 and the center movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the center movable unit 105 in accordance with the center movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. That is, the central movable unit 105 is driven when a specific effect is performed, and moves the movable component 309 to a position covering a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 according to the left movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 in accordance with the right movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. In addition, the sub CPU 81 and the rotating light drive circuit 99 drive the rotating light 543 in accordance with the rotating light drive data specified by the effect contents.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 81 notifies the player of a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player in accordance with the determined internal winning combination. An advantageous game state control means for controlling the state is provided. Such an advantageous gaming state is referred to as “AT”.

[Change of game state]
Next, a gaming state of the pachislo machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 51 shifts two game states as the game state of the pachislot machine 1, a general game state (RT0 game state or RT1 game state) and a BB game state (RB game state).

<Change of general game state>
As shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 51 takes one of the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state as the general gaming state. In the RT0 gaming state, when a bonus combination (BB in the present embodiment) which is a bonus operating combination is internally won, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state.

  The RT0 gaming state is a replay low probability state (low RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replaying combination that is the replaying operation is relatively lower than the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively higher than the RT0 gaming state.

  Here, there is no direct transition from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. Instead, the player wins a BB in the RT1 gaming state, transitions to the BB gaming state, and ends the BB gaming state, thereby returning to the RT0 gaming state again. Will be migrated.

  BB is always in a state of being internally won from the time of winning internally to the time of winning. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “BB carryover state”. That is, in the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state and the BB carryover state have an equivalent relationship.

  Note that the RT1 gaming state is not an RT managed by the number of games, but a gaming state to which the transition is made only when the above-mentioned transition condition is satisfied. In that sense, the RT1 gaming state is infinite RT.

<Change of BB game state>
When the BB wins, the main CPU 51 shifts the gaming state to the BB gaming state. In the present embodiment, during the BB gaming state, control is always performed during the RB gaming state, and when the BB ending condition is satisfied, specifically, in the BB gaming state, a specified number of sheets (75 in this embodiment) If there is a payout of medals exceeding ()), the BB gaming state and the RB gaming state are ended, and the game is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in an internal lottery table for a general game state described later in FIG. 15, in the RT1 game state, one of the internal winning combinations is always determined by lottery. In other words, a unit game in the BB carryover state and not winning any small combination or replay combination will occur only in a unit game internally won for BB. The internal winning combination can be roughly classified into a replay combination, a small combination, and a bonus combination. As shown in FIG. 19 described later, in the present embodiment, the replay combination and the small combination are smaller than the BB. The stop display is configured to be preferentially displayed.

  Therefore, if the BB is internally won but the BB cannot be won in the unit game, the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (for example, all storage due to a backup error of the main RAM 33 at power-on). (Initialization of area) The RT1 gaming state will be continued.

  The transition of the game state is not limited to the above. For example, by providing a plurality of combinations of Bell Lip symbols described below, and at the time of winning the normal Lips 1-4 or Bell Lips 1-4 described later, by changing the combination of winning symbols depending on the stop operation order, a symbol of one Bell Lip The combination may be configured to shift to the above-described RT1 game state when a combination wins, and to shift to the above-described RT0 game state when a combination of other Belllip symbols wins.

  In this case, when the sub CPU 81 is controlled to the advantageous game state, first, a stop operation order in which a combination of the symbols of one Belllip is won is notified, and the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification to perform the stop operation. A transition is made from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Then, in the RT1 gaming state, the stop operation order in which other combinations of Belllip symbols are not won is notified, and the stop operation order in which the payout of medals is the largest for each small winning combination is notified. Thus, similarly, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous for the player can be configured.

[Data table stored in main ROM]
Next, various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions “0” to “19” and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol position data “0” to “19” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The design types are "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "watermelon C", "white blank" and "purple blank". "Is included.

  Here, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “watermelon C” need only be able to identify that the main CPU 51 is a different symbol internally, and in the present embodiment, like the same symbol. It is a symbol that can be recognized by the player. Hereinafter, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B” and “watermelon C” are also collectively referred to as “watermelon”.

<Symbol code table>
As shown in FIG. 11, each symbol arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and in the present embodiment, is distinguished by 2-byte (16-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 11 represents symbol codes as data for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 has been described as representing the arrangement of the symbols arranged on each surface of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, but is actually stored in the main ROM 52. The symbol arrangement table indicates an arrangement of symbol codes specifying the symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are “red 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, “bell”, “cherry”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, “ Watermelon C "," white blank "and" purple blank ".

  In the symbol code table, “1” is assigned as the symbol code for the “red 7” symbol. Also, “2” is assigned as a symbol code for the “BAR” symbol. Also, “3” is assigned as a symbol code for the “replay” symbol.

  Similarly, "4" to "10" are symbol codes for the symbols "bell", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "watermelon C", "white blank" and "purple blank", respectively. Have been assigned.

<Symbol combination table>
In the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the winning operation flag and the payout number are associated with the symbol combination identified by the storage area identification data represented by 27 bytes.

  The winning operation flag is data assigned in correspondence with a unique combination of symbols for representing a winning combination (hereinafter, referred to as a “winning combination”), and includes 1-byte (8-bit) data and a storage area type. In. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data. One-byte data includes data corresponding to a combination of a plurality of symbols. Each symbol combination is distinguished by a storage area type and 1-byte data.

  In the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the names (contents) of the winning combinations are associated with the winning operation flags for the combinations of the symbols, for easy understanding of the invention.

  The payout number is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player corresponding to each symbol combination. When the combination of symbols arranged along the activated line matches the "combination of symbols" in the symbol combination table, the number of medals discharged or the number of credits counted by driving the hopper device 33 is counted based on the corresponding number of payouts. The credit counter is incremented.

  FIG. 12 shows a symbol combination table relating to the bonus combination. When a combination of symbols of “watermelon B-BAR-white blank” representing a winning combination called “BB” is displayed along the activated line in the general game state (RT1 game state), the medal of the medal is displayed. There is no payout, but it indicates that the player has won the BB. In other words, if "BB" has been won while in the general gaming state (RT1 gaming state), the game shifts to the BB gaming state.

  FIG. 13 shows a symbol combination table relating to the replay combination. When the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 13 is displayed along the activated line, it means that there is no payout of medals, but that the winning of the replaying game has been won. That is, when the replay combination is won, the replay can be performed in the next game.

  In FIG. 13, when a symbol combination of “replay-replay-replay” representing a winning combination called “middle lip” is displayed along the activated line, “middle lip” is displayed in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. Replay ”.

  When a combination of symbols of "Bell-Replay-Red 7" representing a winning combination called "Cross-Up Lip 1" is displayed along the active line, "Cross-Up Lip 1" Replay ”. “Cross-up lip 2” to “cross-up lip 4” are the same as “cross-up lip 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of “watermelon A-replay-watermelon A” representing a winning combination called “cross-down lip 1” is displayed along the activated line, the combination is lowered rightward in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Replay" is complete. “Cross down lip 2” to “cross down lip 6” are the same as “cross down lip 1”.

  When a symbol combination of “Replay-Bell-Cherry” representing a winning combination called “Berlip” is displayed along the activated line, “Bells” are aligned to the lower right in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, only the above-described center line is an effective line. However, the combination of symbols related to the replay combination is configured as shown in FIG. 13, and will be described later in the description of FIG. Combinations of symbols related to small roles (for example, upper bells 1 to 12, cross-up bells 1 to 9, lower bells 1 to 3, and cross-down watermelons 1 to 4, etc.) are similarly configured, as if five lines ( The center line in the middle row, the top line in the upper row, the bottom line in the lower row, the cross-down line in the lower right, and the cross-up line in the upper right) are impressive to the player as if they were active lines. I can do it.

  When a symbol combination of “Replay-Replay-Cherry” representing a winning combination called “Chance Lip A1” is displayed along the activated line, “Bell” is displayed on the upper part of the display window 4L and “Lower” on the lower part of the display window 4C. At the bottom of the display window 4R. That is, two “bells” are displayed on at least one of the five lines described above (for example, a bottom line aligned with the lower row or a cross-down line aligned with the lower right) (hereinafter, “tempai”). ), And the remaining one "bell" is displayed on another line (hereinafter, "out of tempai"). For “Chance Lip A2” to “Chance Lip A5” and “Chance Lip B1” to “Chance Lip B3”, “Bell” in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is out of order as in “Chance Lip A1”. Is displayed with.

  When a combination of symbols "Bell-watermelon A-watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "special lip A1" is displayed along the activated line, "watermelon" is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. It is displayed in the tempai out. “Special lip A2” to “special lip A6” and “special lip B” are the same as “special lip A1”.

  When a symbol combination of "BAR-BAR-BAR" representing a winning combination called "BAR Lip A" is displayed along the activated line, "BAR" is displayed in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. I get it. When a combination of symbols of “Replay-BAR-Cherry” representing a winning combination called “BAR Rip E” is displayed along the activated line, “ BAR "in some cases.

  When a combination of symbols “BAR-BAR-watermelon A” representing a winning combination called “BAR Lip B1” is displayed along the activated line, “BAR” is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. Appears off. “BAR lip B2”, “BAR lip B3”, “BAR lip C”, “BAR lip D1”, and “BAR lip D2” are the same as “BAR lip B1”.

  When a symbol combination of "Bell-BAR-watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "BAR lip B4" is displayed along the activated line, "Replay" is displayed in the lower part of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. Are aligned. “BAR lip B5” and “BAR lip B6” are the same as “BAR lip B4”.

  When a combination of symbols "Cherry-ANY-ANY" representing a winning combination called "Cherry Lip A" is displayed along the activated line, "Cherry" is displayed in the middle of the display window 4L. Note that “ANY” indicates that any symbol may be used. That is, in "Cherry lip A", if "Cherry" is displayed in the middle of the display window 4L, a combination of the symbols for which the winning is determined regardless of the symbols displayed in the display windows 4C and 4R. ing.

  When a combination of symbols of “watermelon A-red 7-cherry” representing a winning combination called “cherry lip B1” is displayed along the activated line, “red 7” is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. May be displayed outside the tempai, but basically, when the symbol of “Cherry” in “Cherry lip A” described above cannot be displayed in the middle of the display window 4L, the symbol is displayed. Is defined as a combination. “Cherry lip B2” to “Cherry lip B8” and “Cherry lip C” are the same as “Cherry lip B1”.

  FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B show a symbol combination table relating to a small winning combination having a medal payout. When the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B are displayed along the activated line, medals of the payout number associated with the symbol combinations are paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of “Replay-Watermelon A-Watermelon A” representing a winning combination called “Upper Bell 1” is displayed along the activated line, the upper part of the display window 4L, 4C, 4R displays “Bell 1”. "And seven medals will be paid out. The same applies to “upper bell 2” to “upper bell 12”.

  When a symbol combination of “watermelon A-bell-watermelon A” representing a winning combination called “cross-up bell 1” is displayed along the activated line, the combination rises rightward in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Bell" is completed and 7 medals are paid out. The same applies to “cross-up bell 2” to “cross-up bell 9”.

  When a symbol combination of "BAR-Bell-Replay" representing a winning combination called "middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. "Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A1"-"Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A9", "Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer B1"-"Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer B9" are the same as "Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A1".

  As described later in the description of FIG. 19, the “middle 1st2nd incorrect answer” is, for example, when “middle / left / right cross-up bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination as the “push order small combination”. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated in the stop operation order of "middle left and right", one of "cross-up bell 1" to "cross-up bell 9" wins and seven medals are paid out. That is, when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the "middle right left" stop operation sequence, the stop operation sequence of the first stop operation is correct, but the stop operation of the second stop operation is performed. Since the order is incorrect, any one of "middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A1" to "middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A9" wins and one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of “watermelon A-watermelon A-bell” representing a winning combination called “right 1st incorrect answer A1” is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. "Right 1st incorrect answer A2" to "right 1st incorrect answer A4", "right 1st incorrect answer B1" to "right 1st incorrect answer B4" are the same as "right 1st incorrect answer A1".

  As described later in the description of FIG. 19, the “right 1st incorrect answer” is, for example, when “middle left / right cross-up bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination as the “push order small combination”. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated in the stop operation order of "middle left and right", one of "cross-up bell 1" to "cross-up bell 9" wins and seven medals are paid out. In other words, if “right”, that is, if the stop button 17R is subjected to the first stop operation, the stop operation order is incorrect, and when “missing” described later does not occur, the “right 1st incorrect answer” A1 ”to“ right incorrect first answer A4 ”, or“ right incorrect first answer B1 ”to“ right incorrect first B4 ”win, and one medal is paid out.

  When a symbol combination of "bell-bell-bell" representing a winning combination called "middle bell" is displayed along the activated line, "bells" are aligned in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. , 7 medals will be paid out.

  When a symbol combination of “watermelon A-purple blank-bell” representing a winning combination called “right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1” is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. “Right 1st2nd incorrect answer A2” to “right 1st2nd incorrect answer A6”, “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1” to “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6” are the same as “right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1”.

  As will be described later in the description of FIG. 19, the “right 1st2nd incorrect answer” is, for example, “right and left middle middle bell 1” as the “push order small combination” when “right and left middle bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated in the stop operation sequence of "middle", the "middle bell" wins and seven medals are paid out, but the stop operation of "right center left" is performed. If the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in this order, the stop operation order of the first stop operation is correct, but the stop operation order of the second stop operation is incorrect, so that “right 1st2nd incorrect” One of the "correct answer A1" to the "right 1st2nd incorrect answer A6" wins and one medal is paid out.

  However, as for “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1” to “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6”, “middle left / lower lower bell 1” to “middle left / lower lower bell 3” and “middle right left lower bell 1” as “push order small role” If any one of the "medium right left lower bell 3" is determined as the internal winning combination and the "right", that is, the stop button 17R is first stopped, the stop operation order is incorrect. In this case, "missing", which will be described later, does not occur, and one of "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1" to "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6" wins and one medal is paid out. Therefore, in the case of the above-described internal winning combination, it can be said that the right right is the first incorrect answer, except that the “missing” described later does not occur.

  In addition, any of “Right / Left / Middle Lower Bell 1” to “Right / Left Middle Lower Bell 3”, “Right / Middle Left Lower Bell 1” to “Right / Middle Left Lower Bell 3” as the “push order small role” as an internal winning combination When the determination is made, if the “middle”, that is, the first stop operation of the stop button 17C, the stop operation order is incorrect, but in this case, “missing” described later does not occur, Any one of "Right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1" to "Right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6" wins, and one medal is paid out. Therefore, except for the point that “missing” described later does not occur, in the case of the above-described internal winning combination, it can be said that it is the “middle 1st incorrect answer” described later.

  When a combination of symbols "Bell-Cherry-BAR" representing a winning combination called "Middle 1st incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. "Middle 1st incorrect answer A2" to "Middle 1st incorrect answer A4", "Middle 1st incorrect answer B1" to "Middle 1st incorrect answer B4" are the same as "Middle 1st incorrect answer A1".

  As described later in the description of FIG. 19, the “middle 1st incorrect answer” may be, for example, “right-left-middle-bell 1” as the “push-order small combination” when the “right-left-middle-bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated in the stop operation sequence of "medium", "middle bell" wins and seven medals are paid out, but "medium", that is, the stop button 17C When the first stop operation is performed, the stop operation order is incorrect. Therefore, when the “missing” described later does not occur, “middle 1st incorrect answer A1” to “middle 1st incorrect answer A4” or “ One of the middle 1st incorrect answers B1 to the "1st middle incorrect answer B4" wins and one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of “watermelon A-replay-cherry” representing a winning combination called “lower bell 1” is displayed along the activated line, “bell” is displayed in the lower row in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. And 7 medals will be paid out. The same applies to "lower bell 2" and "lower bell 3".

  When a combination of symbols of “red 7-watermelon A-bell” representing a winning combination called “cross-down watermelon 1” is displayed along the activated line, the combination moves downward in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Watermelon" is available and 3 medals will be paid out. The same applies to “cross-down watermelon 2” to “cross-down watermelon 4”.

  When the combination of the symbols “watermelon B-watermelon A-watermelon A” representing the winning combination called “middle watermelon 1” is displayed along the activated line, the “watermelon B-watermelon A-watermelon A” is displayed in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Watermelon" and three medals will be paid out. “Middle watermelon 2” to “middle watermelon 6” are the same as “middle watermelon 1”.

  When a combination of symbols "BAR-cherry-white blank" representing a winning combination called "corner cherry A1-1" is displayed along the activated line, "cherry" is displayed in the lower part of the display window 4L. Then, three medals are paid out. "Square cherry A1-2" to "Square cherry A1-8", "Square cherry B1-1" to "Square cherry B1-4", "Square cherry B2-1" to "Square cherry B2-24", "Square cherry" "Cherry B3-1" to "Square Cherry B3-4", "Square Cherry B4-1" to "Square Cherry B4-3", "Square Cherry B5-1" to "Square Cherry B5-4", "Square Cherry C1" -1 "to" Square Cherry C1-8 "," Square Cherry C2-1 "to" Square Cherry C2-12 "," Square Cherry C3-1 "to" Square Cherry C3-6 "," Square Cherry C4-1 " "To" corner cherry C4-3 "," cherry "is displayed in the upper row or lower row in the display window 4L similarly to" corner cherry A1-1 ".

  When a symbol combination of "watermelon B-bell-bell" representing a winning combination called "special combination A" is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. "Special combination B" and "special combination C" are the same as "special combination A".

  Here, when the “special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination of “weak cherry”, “strong cherry 1”, and “strong cherry 2”, none of the above “corner cherry” can be won. In the case, that is, when “Cherry” cannot be displayed in the upper or lower row in the display window 4L according to the timing of the stop operation, the “special role” is displayed with priority over “BB”. By performing the stop control, "BB" is defined as a combination of symbols for controlling so as not to win.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbol relating to the replay combination and the combination of the symbol relating to the small combination are given the above-mentioned names so as to be distinguished from each other, but the name is not necessarily the combination of the symbols. It does not limit the role of.

<Internal lottery table>
In the plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a lottery value and a data pointer for each gaming state are associated with a winning number. Note that the internal lottery table is usually stored in the main ROM 52 for each set value (for example, set values 1 to 6) of the pachislot machine 1. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, explanation will be made using one internal lottery table.

  In the present embodiment, a random number for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0-65535” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not the subtraction result is negative (Ie, whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred), an internal lottery is performed.

  Therefore, the larger the value specified as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data (that is, the data pointer) is determined. When the number of times of the process of determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative exceeds the number of the winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process is “losing”.

  The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”. In the present embodiment, the types of internal winning combinations determined and the winning probabilities are varied by selectively using a plurality of types of internal lottery tables, and as a result, the expectations of the player are raised and lowered.

  The data pointer is data obtained as a result of a lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data for designating an internal winning combination defined by an internal winning combination determination table described later.

  That is, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and the 1-byte data in the small combination / replay winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17 and the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. . In the data pointer, a small combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

  The method of the internal lottery process is not limited to the above-described method. For example, a random number for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” may be added to the lottery according to each winning number. The internal lottery may be performed by sequentially adding the values, and determining whether the result of the addition has reached a predetermined value (for example, whether or not the value has become a predetermined value or more for each winning number).

(Internal lottery table for general game state)
As shown in FIG. 15, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state referred to in the general gaming state defines the lottery value of each winning number in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state. In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the winning numbers “1” to “45” in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state are respectively associated with the small win / replay data pointers “1” to “45”. Note that “(between BB flags)” in the RT1 gaming state is synonymous with the “BB carryover state” described above.

  The lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16” and “46” are different between the RT0 game state and the RT1 gaming state, and the lottery values of the winning numbers “17” to “45” are the same. The winning number “46” is associated with “1” as a bonus data pointer, and when BB is determined as an internal winning combination, only BB is determined as an internal winning combination (single winning). Is set.

  In detail, in the RT0 gaming state, when the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16” are added, the value is set to “8978”, and the lottery value of the winning number “46” is set to “5851”. ing. On the other hand, in the RT1 gaming state, the sum of the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16” is set to “14829”, which is set higher than in the RT0 gaming state, and the lottery of the winning number “46”. The value is set to “0”. That is, the lottery value corresponding to the difference of the winning number “46” is assigned to the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16”.

(Internal lottery table for RB gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 16, the RB gaming state internal lottery table referred to in the RB gaming state defines the lottery value of each winning number in the RB gaming state. In the RB gaming state internal lottery table, the winning numbers “1” and “2” are associated with the small pointer / replay data pointers “46” and “47”, respectively. In the present embodiment, since the RB gaming state is always in the RB gaming state, the RB gaming state internal lottery table can be rephrased as the BB gaming state internal lottery table.

<Small win / replay internal winning combination determination table>
In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17, data for identifying a combination of winning-allowed symbols (winning operation flag) is associated with the small winning combination / replay data pointer. ing.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17, for convenience, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted for the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and the name (content) of the winning combination and The names of internal winning combinations (remarks) are associated with each other.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 17, since a plurality of symbol combinations (winning operation flags) for which winning is permitted are associated with one data pointer, a plurality of combinations of symbols can be executed in one internal lottery process. The winning of the symbol combination (winning operation flag) is permitted. These internal lottery methods are referred to as a “simultaneous winning” method and a “duplicate winning” method.

  In the present embodiment, one symbol combination (winning operation flag) for which a prize is permitted can be defined as "internal winning combination", and prize is permitted for one data pointer. A combination of a plurality of symbols (winning operation flag) can be defined as an internal winning combination as one unit. In FIGS. 17 to 20, the latter is defined as an internal winning combination.

  In the small win / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small win / replay data pointer “0” is associated with “losing”.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “1” indicates “normal lip 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “cross-up lip 1 to 4”, “cross-down lip 1 to 6”, and “bell lip” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “2” indicates “normal lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted. As “winning operation flags”, “middle lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, “cross-down lip 1-6”, “bell lip”, and “special lip A1-6” are associated.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “3” indicates “normal lip 3” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “cross-up lip 1 to 4”, “cross-down lip 1 to 6”, “bell lip”, and “special lip B” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “4” indicates “normal lip 4” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, “cross-down lip 1-6”, “bell lip”, “special lip A1-6” and “special lip B” are associated. Have been.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “5” indicates “Berlip 1” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of the symbols for which a winning is permitted ( “Middle lip” and “Bell lip” are associated with each other as a winning operation flag).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “6” indicates “Bell Lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( As "winning operation flags", "middle lip", "bell lip", and "special lip A1 to 6" are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “7” indicates “Bell Lip 3” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted ( As the winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “bell lip”, and “special lip B” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “8” indicates “Belllip 4” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted ( As the winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “bell lip”, “special lips A1 to 6” and “special lip B” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “9” indicates “chance lip 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted. “Chance lip A1 to 5” and “chance lip B1 to 3” are associated as (winning operation flags).

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “10” indicates “chance lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted. “Chance lip A1 to 5”, “chance lip B1 to 3”, and “bell lip” are associated as (winning operation flags).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “11” indicates “strong chance lip” as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “special lips A1 to 6”, and “special lip B” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “12” indicates “cherry lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted ( "BAR lip B1-6", "BAR lip C", "BAR lip D1,2", "BAR lip E", "Cherry lip A", and "Cherry lip B1-8" are associated with each other as a winning operation flag). Have been.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “13” indicates “strong cherry lip” as the internal winning combination. As (prize operation flags), “BAR lip B1 to 6”, “BAR lip C”, “BAR lip D1, 2”, “BAR lip E”, “Cherry lip A”, “Cherry lip B1 to 8”, “ "BAR lip A" and "cherry lip C" are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “14” indicates “BAR Rip 1” as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted. "Middle lip", "Cross-up lip 1-4", "BAR lip A", "BAR lip B1-6", "BAR lip C", and "BAR lip D1,2" correspond to (prize operation flag). It is attached.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “15” indicates “BAR Lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, “BAR lip A”, “BAR lip B1-6”, “BAR lip C”, “BAR lip D1,2”, “BAR lip D1,2” "Berlip" and "BAR lip E" are associated with each other.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “16” indicates “fake BAR lip” as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), “middle lip”, “cross-up lip 1 to 4”, and “BAR lip D1, 2” are associated.

  In the small win / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small win / replay data pointer “17” indicates “middle / left / right cross-up bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Upper Bell 1”, “Cross Up Bells 1 to 9”, “Middle 1st 2nd Incorrect Answer A1 to 9”, and “Right 1st Incorrect Answer A1 to 4” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags). .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “18” indicates “middle left / right cross-up bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Upper Bell 2”, “Cross Up Bells 1 to 9”, “Middle 1st 2nd Incorrect Answer A1 to 9”, and “Right 1st Incorrect Answer A1 to 4” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags). .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “19” indicates “middle left / right cross-up bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Upper Bell 3”, “Cross Up Bells 1 to 9”, “Middle 1st 2nd Incorrect Answer A1 to 9”, and “Right 1st Incorrect Answer A1 to 4” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags). .

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “20” indicates “middle right left cross-up bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Upper Bell 4”, “Cross Up Bells 1 to 9”, “Middle 1st 2nd Incorrect A1 to 9”, and “Right 1st Incorrect B1 to 4” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags). .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “21” indicates “middle right left cross-up bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. "Upper bell 5", "cross-up bells 1 to 9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answers A1 to 9", and "right 1st incorrect answers B1 to 4" are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags). .

  In the small win / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small win / replay data pointer “22” indicates “middle right / left cross-up bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 6”, “cross-up bells 1 to 9”, “middle 1st 2nd incorrect answers A1 to 9”, and “right 1st incorrect answers B1 to 4” are associated. .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “23” indicates “right, left, middle and middle bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and is a symbol for which winning is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), “Upper Bell 7”, “Middle Bell”, “Right 1st2nd incorrect answers A1-6” and “Middle 1st incorrect answers A1-4” are associated.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “24” indicates “right, left, middle and middle bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the symbols for which a winning is permitted. (Winning operation flag), "upper bell 8", "middle bell", "right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-6", and "middle 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated with each other.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “25” indicates “right, left, middle and middle bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and the symbols for which a winning is permitted. (Winning operation flag), "upper bell 9", "middle bell", "right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "26" indicates "right center left middle row bell 1" as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Upper Bell 10”, “Middle Bell”, “Right 1st2nd incorrect answers A1 to 6”, and “Middle 1st incorrect answers B1 to 4” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “27” indicates “right center left middle row bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. "Upper Bell 11", "Middle Bell", "Right 1st2nd incorrect answers A1-6" and "Middle 1st incorrect answers B1-4" are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “28” indicates “right middle left middle row bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. "Upper Bell 12", "Middle Bell", "Right 1st2nd incorrect answers A1-6" and "Middle 1st incorrect answers B1-4" are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “29” indicates “middle left / right lower bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the symbols for which a prize is permitted are set. (Winning operation flags) are associated with "Upper Bell 1,2", "Lower Bell 1-3," "Middle 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-9," and "Right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-6." .

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “30” indicates “middle left / right lower bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the symbols for which a prize is permitted are set. (Upper bells 3 and 4), "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 9", and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6" are associated with each other. .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “31” indicates “middle left / right lower bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and the symbols for which a prize is permitted are set. "Upper bells 5 and 6", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 9", and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6" are associated with each other. .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “32” indicates “middle right lower left bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the symbols for which a prize is permitted are set. (Winning operation flags) are associated with “Upper Bells 7, 8”, “Lower Bells 1-3”, “Middle 1st2nd Incorrect B1-9”, and “Right 1st2nd Incorrect B1-6”. .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “33” indicates “middle right left lower bell 2” as an internal winning combination, and the symbols for which a prize is permitted are set. (Winning operation flags) are associated with “Upper Bell 9, 10”, “Lower Bell 1 to 3”, “Medium 1st2nd incorrect answer B1 to 9”, and “Right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6”. .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “34” indicates “middle right lower left lower bell 3” as an internal winning combination, and the symbols for which a winning is permitted. "Upper bells 11 and 12", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 9", and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6" are associated with each other. .

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “35” indicates “right, left, middle, and lower-level bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and is a symbol for which a prize is permitted. (Upper bells 1 and 2), "lower bells 1 to 3", and "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6" are associated with each other.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “36” indicates “right, left, middle, lower row bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and is a symbol for which a prize is permitted. (Upper bells 3 and 4), "lower bells 1 to 3", and "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6" are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “37” indicates “right, left, middle and lower bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and is a symbol for which a prize is permitted. (Upper bells 5, 6), "lower bells 1-3", and "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-6" are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “38” indicates “right center left lower bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Upper bells 7 and 8”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, and “right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "39" indicates "right center left lower bell 2" as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Upper bells 9 and 10”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, and “right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “40” indicates “right center left lower bell 3” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Upper bells 11 and 12”, “lower bells 1 to 3”, and “right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “41” indicates “strong bell” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of the symbols for which a winning is permitted ( As "winning operation flags", "upper bells 1 to 12," "cross-up bells 1 to 9," and "lower bells 1 to 3" are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “42” indicates “watermelon” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning) “Cross-down watermelons 1 to 4” and “middle watermelons 1 to 6” are associated as operation flags).

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “43” indicates “weak cherry” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of the symbols for which the winning is permitted ( As a winning operation flag), “corner cherry A1-1-8”, “corner cherry B3-1-4”, “corner cherry C1-1-8”, “corner cherry C2-1-12”, “corner cherry C3” “-1 to 6”, “corner cherry C4-1 to 3”, “special combination A”, “special combination B”, and “special combination C” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “44” indicates “strong cherry 1” as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted. As (prize operation flags), “corner cherry A1-1-8”, “corner cherry B1-1-4”, “corner cherry B2-1-24”, “corner cherry B3-1-4”, “corner cherry” B4-1 to 3 "," Kaku Cherry B5-1 to 4 "," Kaku Cherry C2-1 to 12 "," Special combination A "," Special combination B ", and" Special combination C "are associated with each other. .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “45” indicates “strong cherry 2” as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols for which a winning is permitted. As (prize operation flags), “corner cherry A1-1-8”, “corner cherry B1-1-4”, “corner cherry B2-1-24”, “corner cherry B3-1-4”, “corner cherry” B4-1-3, "corner cherry B5-1-4," "corn cherry C2-1-1-12," "special combination A," and "special combination C."

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “46” indicates “RB medium / small winning combination A” as the internal winning combination. "Medium 1st2nd incorrect answer A1-9" is associated as a combination (winning operation flag).

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “47” indicates “RB medium / small winning combination B” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol for which the winning is permitted is set. All combinations (ie, combinations of all the symbols shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B) are associated as combinations (winning operation flags).

  Here, referring to the RB gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16, “RB small and medium combination A” corresponds to the winning number “1” and is internally won with a winning probability of 39425/65536. On the other hand, with reference to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability of “middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A1 to 9” associated with “RB middle and small combination A” is 2734 × 6/65536 = 16404. / 65536.

  Referring to the RB gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16, “RB small and medium combination B” corresponds to the winning number “2” and is internally won with a winning probability of 16406/65536. On the other hand, when referring to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability is the highest among the combinations of symbols (winning operation flags) permitted to win corresponding to "RB small and medium win B". Are “cross-up bells 1 to 9” corresponding to the winning numbers “17” to “22” and “41”, and the winning probability is (2734 × 6 + 1) / 65536 = 16405/65536.

  Therefore, in the RB gaming state, a winning probability higher than that in the normal gaming state, that is, a winning probability more advantageous for the player is set for each symbol combination (winning operation flag) in which winning is permitted.

<Bonus internal winning combination determination table>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, data for identifying the internal winning combination is associated with the bonus data pointer.

  In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, the internal winning combination data is omitted from the bonus data pointer for convenience, and the name (contents) of the winning combination and the name of the internal winning combination ( Remarks) and are associated with each other.

  In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer “0” is associated with “losing”. Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer “1” indicates “BB” as the internal winning combination, and “B” is set as a symbol combination (winning operation flag) for which a winning is permitted. BB ”is associated therewith.

[Relationship between stop operation order for internal winning combination and winning combination]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the relationship between the stop operation sequence for the internal winning combination and the winning combination will be described.

  In FIG. 19, as the stop operation order, “left center right” means that stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17L, stop button 17C, stop button 17R, and “middle left and right” indicates the stop button 17L, The stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17R and the stop button 17C, and “middle left and right” means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17C, the stop button 17L, and the stop button 17R. "Right and left" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17C, the stop button 17R, and the stop button 17L. "Middle right and left" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17R, the stop button 17L, and the stop button 17C. "Right center left" means stop button 17R, stop button 17C, it means that the order stop operation of the stop buttons 17L is made.

<Outline of reel stop>
In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations for which winning is permitted for one internal winning combination are associated with each other, and at what timing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated (stop Depending on the operation timing) and in what order (stopping operation order), control may be performed so that the winning combination finally displayed also varies.

  That is, regarding the symbol combination finally displayed on the activated line (in other words, as the base information when the main CPU 51 executes the reel stop control), It is determined based on the following three factors.

  The first element is an internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is “losing” (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “0”), a combination of symbols related to any replay combination or a combination of symbols related to small combination Is not finally displayed on the active line.

  The second element is the player's stop operation timing (in other words, the position of the symbol when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, since four symbols are set as the maximum number of sliding pieces, even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery processing, the winning is permitted. If the symbols composing the combination of the symbols are arranged so as to exceed four symbols, the combination of symbols permitted to win may not be displayed depending on the timing of the stop operation of the player. . This is referred to as so-called "missing", and in FIG. 19, "or missing" means that there is "missing". Therefore, in the same figure, when "or lost" is not described, at least one of the combinations of the winning combinations described is displayed, which means that there is no "missing". .

  The third element is the player's stop operation sequence. For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is “normal rep 1” (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “1”), regardless of the stop operation sequence, regardless of the stop operation timing, As shown in FIG. 19, a combination of symbols related to any replay combination is displayed on the payline. On the other hand, if the result of the internal lottery processing is “middle left / right cross-up bell 1” (the value of the small part / replay data pointer is “17”), and if the stop operation order is “middle left / right”, Regardless of the stop operation timing, any combination of symbols of "cross-up bells 1 to 9" is displayed on the activated line, and when the stop operation order is "middle right left", regardless of the stop operation timing , One of the symbol combinations of “middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A1 to 9” is displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, when the stop operation order is “left-center-right” or “left-right-center”, the stop operation timing is a timing at which a symbol constituting the combination of the symbols of “upper bell 1” can be displayed on the active line. Only in this case, the symbol combination of “Upper Bell 1” is displayed on the activated line, and if the stop operation order is “Right-Left Middle” or “Right-Middle-Left”, the stop operation timing is “Right 1st incorrect answer”. A1 to 4 ”right one of the symbol combinations A1 to 4” is displayed on the active line only when it is possible to display the symbols that constitute any of the symbol combinations A1 to 4 ”on the active line. Is displayed.

  Here, the internal winning combination “middle left / right cross-up bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “17”), “the middle left / right cross-up bell 2” (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “ 18)), "Middle left / right cross-up bell 3" (small hand / replay data pointer value is "19"), "Middle left / right lower bell 1" (small hand / replay data pointer value is "29") , "Middle left / right lower bell 2" (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is "30") and "Middle left / right lower bell 3" (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is "31") are stopped. Focusing on the operation order (see FIG. 19), they are common in that similar benefits can be provided, and thus can be generically called “middle and left and right bells”.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle left / right bell”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is “middle left / right”. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “middle left / right bell”, the stop operation sequence “middle left / right” is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “middle right left cross-up bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “20”), “the middle right left cross-up bell 2” (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “21”) )), "Middle right left cross-up bell 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "22"), "middle right left lower row bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "32"), "Middle right left lower bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "33") and "middle right left lower bell 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "34") Paying attention to the order (see FIG. 19), they can be generically called “middle right left bell” because they are common in that similar benefits can be provided.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle right left bell”, seven medals are paid out only when the stop operation order is “middle right left” regardless of the stop operation timing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “middle right left bell”, the stop operation sequence “middle right left” is the stop operation procedure that is most advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “Right / Left / Middle Bell 1” (the value of the small hand / replay data pointer is “23”), “Right and Left Middle Bell 2” (the value of the small hand / replay data pointer is “24”) "Right / Left / Middle Bell 3" (Small Role / Replay Data Pointer Value is "25"), "Right / Left Middle Lower Bell 1" (Small Role / Replay Data Pointer Value is "35"), "Right / Left Middle The lower-level bell 2 (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “36”) and the “right / left middle lower-level bell 3” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “37”) are the stop operation order (FIG. 19), they can be generically referred to as "right-left center bell" because they are common in that similar benefits can be provided.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “Right / Left Middle Bell”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is “Right / Left Middle”. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "Right Left Middle Bell", the stop operation sequence "Right Left Middle" is the stop operation procedure that is most advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “Right Middle Left Middle Bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “26”), “Right Middle Left Middle Bell 2” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “27”) ")," Right Middle Left Middle Bell 3 "(Small Role / Replay Data Pointer Value is" 27 ")," Right Middle Left Lower Bell 1 "(Small Role / Replay Data Pointer Value is" 38 ") , “Right middle left lower bell 2” (small role / replay data pointer value is “39”) and “Right middle left lower bell 3” (small role / replay data pointer value is “40”) Focusing on the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 19), they can be generically called "right center left bell" because they are common in that similar benefits can be provided.

  In other words, if the result of the internal lottery process is “Right Middle Left Bell”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is “Right Middle Left”. It is. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “Right Middle Left Bell”, the stop operation sequence “Right Middle Left” is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

  As described above, the internal winning combination in which the profit of the player fluctuates based on the third element described above is called a “push-sequence”, and when it is a replay combination, it is called “push-sequence replay”. In the case of a small combination, it may be referred to as a “push order small combination”.

  In the present embodiment, a case in which the “middle left / right bell”, “middle right / left bell”, “right / left middle bell”, and “right / middle left bell” and “right middle / left bell”, which are “push order small wins”, are determined as internal winning combinations during the AT In addition, a stop operation sequence in which seven medals are paid out is notified.

<Structure of push order small role>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a description will be given of the configuration of the small push order combination in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small push order in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a small push order in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the pushing order small combination when the structure of is not applied.

  In FIG. 20A, “middle left / right bell A” conceptually means “middle left / right cross-up bells 1 to 3” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “17” to “19”). The "middle right left bell A" conceptually represents "middle right left cross-up bells 1 to 3" (the value of the small part / replay data pointer is "20" to "22"). "B" conceptually represents "Right / Left Middle Bells 1-3" (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is "23"-"25"). Left middle bells 1 to 3 "(small role / replay data pointer values" 26 "to" 28 ") are conceptually represented, and" middle left and right bells C "are" middle left and right lower bells 1 to 3 "( The small pointer / replay data pointer value conceptually represents “29” to “31”), and “middle right / left bell C” indicates “middle right / left bell C”. The lower right and left lower bells 1 to 3 (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “32” to “34”) are conceptually represented, and the “right and left middle bell C” is “right and left lower bells 1 to 3” ( The small pointer / replay data pointer value conceptually represents “35” to “37”. “Right middle left bell C” is “right middle left lower bell 1 to 3” (small role / replay data). The pointer value conceptually represents "38" to "40").

  In FIG. 20 (a), "one unquestioned sheet" is, as shown in FIG. 19, "middle left and right lower bells 1 to 3" (the value of the small part / replay data pointer is "29" to "31"). )), "Middle right left lower bell 1 to 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "32" to "34"), "right left middle lower bell 1 to 3" (small hand / replay data pointer "Medium 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-9" in "35"-"37") and "Right middle left lower bell 1-3" (value of small part / replay data pointer is "38"-"40") And "Right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1-6". Similarly, "push order correct answer rises right seven sheets", "push order correct answer middle seven pieces", "push order correct answer lower seven pieces", "pressed position correct upper seven pieces", "pressed position correct one piece" and “One stop right answer” also conceptually represents the winning combination shown in FIG.

  In addition, in FIG. 20B, “Right / Left Middle Bell A” conceptually represents “Right / Left Middle Cross-up Bells 1-3” if it is defined as an internal winning combination. Only when the order is "right and left middle", it indicates that one of the "cross-up bells 1 to 9" is won and seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Also, if the right middle left bell A is defined as an internal winning combination, the right middle left bell A is a conceptual representation of the right middle left cross-up bells 1-3, and the stop operation order is “right middle left "Indicates that one of the" cross-up bells 1 to 9 "is won and seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Also, if it is assumed that “middle left and right bell B” is defined as an internal winning combination, “middle left and right middle bells 1 to 3” are conceptually represented, and the stop operation order is “middle left and right”. This means that regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the player wins the "middle bell" and pays out seven medals. In addition, if "Middle right left bell B" is defined as an internal winning combination, it is a conceptual representation of "Middle right left Middle bells 1 to 3", and the stop operation order is "Middle right left". This means that regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the player wins the "middle bell" and pays out seven medals.

  In FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B, “pressed position correct” means that the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, that is, “missing” occurs in the second element described above. This indicates that the stop operation was performed without performing the operation. For example, the “pressed position correct upper seven sheets” means that if the stop operation order is “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, the stop operation timing is won among “upper bells 1 to 12” ( Only when it is possible to display a symbol constituting a combination of symbols related to the “upper bell” for which “winning is permitted” on the payline, the winning “upper bell” is won. Are displayed on the pay line, indicating that seven medals will be paid out.

  In FIGS. 20A and 20B, "(1/4)" or "(1/2)" means a symbol on at least one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Due to the arrangement, when a stop operation is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing at which one predetermined symbol is displayed on one of the reels, another predetermined display that is not displayed depending on the predetermined stop operation timing When there are symbols, the number of the predetermined symbols (in other words, the number of selections when the player selects the stop operation timing) is shown.

  For example, when “upper bells 1 to 12” are viewed as one group, on the reel 3L, the “Replay” symbol is arranged so as to be displayed on the activated line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and on the reel 3R, , “Watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “watermelon C” symbols (one symbol group) are arranged so as to be displayed on the activated line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. On the other hand, in the reel 3C, “watermelon A” (corresponding to “upper bells 1 to 3”), “watermelon C (corresponding to“ upper bells 4 to 6 ”),“ white blank ”(“ upper bells 7 to 9 ”) ) And "Red 7" (corresponding to "Upper bells 10 to 12") are the above-described predetermined symbols, and when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation timing for displaying any of these symbols, the stop is performed. At the operation timing, they are arranged so that other symbols are not displayed. That is, on the reel 3C, the predetermined symbols are arranged such that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is four (see FIGS. 10, 14a and 14b).

  Further, for example, when the “middle 1st incorrect answers A1 to A4” and the “middle 1st incorrect answers B1 to B4” are viewed as one group, in the reel 3L, the “bell” and “watermelon B” symbols (one symbol group) ) Is arranged so as to be displayed on the activated line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and on the reel 3C, the "Cherry" symbol is arranged so as to be displayed on the activated line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. I have. On the other hand, on the reel 3R, “BAR” (corresponding to “middle 1st incorrect answer A1, A3”), “watermelon A” (corresponding to “middle 1st incorrect answer A2, A4”), and “watermelon B” (“middle 1st incorrect answer A2, A4”) "Incorrect B1, B3" and "Red 7" (corresponding to "Medium 1st incorrect B2, B4") are the above-mentioned predetermined symbols, and are stopped at a stop operation timing for displaying any one of these symbols. When an operation is performed, other symbols are arranged so as not to be displayed at the stop operation timing. That is, on the reel 3R, the predetermined symbols are arranged such that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is two (see FIGS. 10, 14a and 14b).

  Here, when comparing FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B, in FIG. 20A, the number of internal winning combinations is eight, whereas in FIG. The number of winning combinations is twelve, and the number of internal winning combinations increases by four. In addition, in (a) of FIG. 20, when it is desired to set the sum of the lottery values of the desired push order small combination to “4000” (that is, to assign “1000” lottery values to the correct push order) ), The lottery values can be uniformly assigned, whereas in FIG. 20B, the desired lottery values cannot be equally assigned.

  As described above, according to the configuration of the pressing order small combination according to the present embodiment, the number of the internal winning combinations can be reduced without making the appearance of the pressing order small combination (combination of displayed symbols) monotonous. By reducing the number, it is possible to reduce the amount of data and reduce the control burden of the internal lottery process. Further, since it becomes easier to assign desired lottery values evenly, fairness of lottery and ease of design are improved. It will also help.

  In FIG. 20A, the lottery values (for example, “250”) of “middle left and right bell C”, “middle right left bell C”, “right left middle bell C”, and “right middle left bell C” are displayed. Instead of lowering the lottery value (for example, “750”) of “middle left and right bell A”, “middle right left bell A”, “right left middle bell B” and “right middle left bell B”, “middle left and right bell” "C", "Middle right left bell C", "Right left middle bell C" or "Right middle left bell C", even if the stop operation order is incorrect due to any stop operation order, "Missing" Does not occur, and "one unquestionable" is won and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, in FIG. 20B, the stop operation sequence of the first stop operation is incorrect. As far as there is, there is always the possibility of "missing".

  As described above, according to the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment, even if the stop operation order is incorrect, in the push order small combination that relatively lowers the lottery value, By giving the minimum profit to the player, as a result, the bias of the profit given to the player can be reduced, which contributes to the fairness of the game.

  As described above, the configuration of the pushing small combination according to the present embodiment has been described using FIG. 20, but the configuration of the pushing small combination according to the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, in the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment, when the stop operation order is “left middle right” or “left right middle”, there is no case where the push order is correct, but the push order is not provided. A case where the answer is correct may be provided.

  In this case, “left middle right bell D” and “left middle right bell D” are defined, and when the “left middle right bell D” is won, the stop operation is performed only when the stop operation order is “left middle right”. Regardless of the timing, the player wins one of the "upper bells 1 to 12" and pays out seven medals. When the "right and left middle bell D" is won, the stop operation order is "left and right middle". In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, any one of the "upper bells 1 to 12" may be won and seven medals may be paid out. Further, “left middle right bell C” and “left middle right bell C” are defined, and when the “left middle right bell C” is won, the stop operation timing is limited only when the stop operation order is “left middle right”. Regardless of this, it is assumed that one of the "lower bells 1 to 3" is won and seven medals are paid out. When the "left and right middle bell C" is won, the stop operation order is "left and right middle". Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, any one of the “lower bells 1 to 3” may be won and seven medals may be paid out. Further, "one unquestioned sheet", "one depressed position correct answer", and "first stop correct answer" may be configured in the same manner as described above.

  Further, for example, it is supposed that “7” medals are paid out when the pressing order is correct, and “1” medals are paid out when the pressing order is incorrect. However, when the pressing order is correct, the number of medals to be inserted is three or more. It is only necessary to pay out the number of medals equal to or less than the prescribed number (15), and the number can be appropriately set. Further, when the pushing order is incorrect, the number of medals that is one or more and less than the number of inserted medals (three) may be paid out, and the number of medals can be set as appropriate. Further, when the pushing order is incorrect, the number of medals less than the number of medals paid out when the pushing order is correct may be paid out.

<Reel stop control>
The main CPU 51 executes the following processing to realize the above-described reel stop control.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines an internal winning combination in an internal lottery process (see S14 in FIG. 42) described later, and stores information on the internal winning combination in the main RAM 53. In step S16 of S42), various types of stop control information stored in the main ROM 52 are read out and stored in the main RAM 53 based on the internal winning combination.

  Here, as an example of information stored as various types of stop control information, in relation to the above-described second element, when a stop button is operated at which symbol position on each reel, which symbol position is to be stopped ( The number of sliding pieces is directly or indirectly specified, and in connection with the third element described above, when a stop button is operated in which stop operation order, which combination of symbols is preferentially displayed. Or information that directly or indirectly defines the information.

  Next, in a reel stop control process (see S22 in FIG. 42) described later, the main CPU 51 stops each reel based on various types of stop control information stored in the main RAM 53. In particular, when the internal winning combination is “push order combination”, appropriate stop control information is selected from the stored stop control information according to the stop operation order, or one stop operation is performed. After that, stop control information is generated (changed) to perform stop control.

  Depending on the stop operation timing and the stop operation order, different stop controls may be executed even for the same internal winning combination, but the stop control is uniquely determined in advance, and The same stop control is executed as long as the internal winning combination and the same stop operation timing and the same stop operation order.

[Configuration of storage area allocated to main RAM]
Next, the configuration of various storage areas allocated to the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 21 is configured by 27 storing areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 27. The internal winning combination storage area is configured to be able to store data (bits) corresponding to each symbol combination defined in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14. “1” is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the permitted symbol combination, and “0” is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the symbol combination for which the winning is not permitted.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 22 includes 27 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 27. The display combination storing area is configured in the same manner as the above-described internal winning combination storing area. As a result of the internal lottery processing, a symbol combination that can be displayed on the activated line is selected from among combinations of the symbols for which winning is permitted. “1” is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the combination, and “0” is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. Each time the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop, the display combination storage area updates its data (bits) based on data (bits) stored in a symbol code storage area described later. , Even after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped, the symbol combination in which "1" is set will be a winning combination. That is, the display combination storage area is used by the main CPU 51 to identify a winning combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped.

<Symbol code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 23 is composed of 27 symbol code storage areas 1 to 27. The symbol code storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area described above, and is an effective one of the combinations of the symbols defined in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. "1" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the line, and "0" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. Set. Further, in the symbol code storage area, each time the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are stopped, the data (bit) thereof is updated.

<Storage area for carryover role>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 24 stores data related to the carryover combination. For example, in the case of the BB carryover state (that is, when “BB” is determined as the internal winning combination), bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area is set to “1”, and “BB” is won to win BB. When shifting to the gaming state, the corresponding bit is reset to “0”.

<Gaming state flag storage area>
The gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 25 stores data relating to the BB gaming state, the RB gaming state, and the RT gaming state. For example, when the BB gaming state is set, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1” and bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1”.

  Also, when the RT gaming state is set to the RT1 gaming state, bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1”, and when the RT gaming state is set to the RT0 gaming state, Bit 2 is reset to "0".

  In the following description, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is also called “BB game state flag”, bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is also called “RB game state flag”, and bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 2 is also referred to as “RT1 gaming state flag”.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The state of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is stored in the operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. Bit 0 corresponds to stop button 17L. When stop button 17L is operated, "1" is stored in bit 0.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to stop button 17C, and when stop button 17C is operated, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to the stop button 17R. When the stop button 17R is operated, "1" is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to stop button 17L. When stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to stop button 17C. When stop button 17C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to stop button 17R. When stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, the effective stop buttons refer to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of detecting a stop operation by the main CPU 51.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 27 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. Bit 0 corresponds to a pressing order of “left → middle → right”. When the pressing order is “left → middle → right”, “1” is stored in bit 0, and other bits are set to “0”. Reset.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to a pressing order of “left → right → middle”, bit 2 corresponds to a pressing order of “middle → left → right”, and bit 3 corresponds to a pressing order of “middle → right → left”. , Bit 4 corresponds to a pressing order of “right → left → middle”, and bit 5 corresponds to a pressing order of “right → middle → left”.

<Direction game state storage area>
The effect game state storage area shown in FIG. 28 is an area for storing an effect game state managed by the main control side (that is, the main CPU 51). Bit 0 corresponds to the effect game state “main CZ state 1”, and “1” is stored in bit 0 when the effect game state is “main CZ state 1”.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the effect game state “main CZ state 2”, bit 2 corresponds to the effect game state “pseudo probability change state 1”, and bit 3 corresponds to the effect game state “pseudo probability change state 2”. , And bit 4 corresponds to the effect game state “AT state”. When all bits are “0”, the effect game state corresponds to the “normal game state”. The details of each effect game state will be described later.

[Structure of various lottery tables used for effects etc.]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 37, the configuration of various lottery tables used for effects and the like will be described.

<Main CZ state reel action lottery table>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a reel action random determination table for the main CZ state stored in the main ROM 52. The main CZ state reel action lottery table is referred to in a normal game lottery process described later in the description of FIG. 48, and when the effect game state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2”, It is used to determine a reel action that is an effect according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the main CZ state reel action lottery table indicates whether the effect game state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (type of main CZ state), and the main CZ state. Of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined based on the value of the CZ game number counter indicating the number of games in which the game has stayed, and which internal winning combination has been determined. Lottery values are assigned as follows.

  For example, when the effect game state is “Main CZ state 1”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “1”, and the internal winning combination is “Replay”, the reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 32768/65536. Reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 8192/65536, reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 23808/65536, reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 256/65536, and reel action 6 is determined with a probability of 256/65536. Is determined, and the reel action 8 is determined with a probability of 256/65536.

  For example, when the effect game state is “Main CZ state 1”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “8”, and the internal winning combination is “Replay”, the reel action 2 has a probability of 64512/65536. Is determined, the reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 512/65536, and the reel action 6 is determined with a probability of 512/65536.

  For example, when the effect game state is “Main CZ state 2”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “1 to 7” or “8”, and the internal winning combination is “Replay”, 52428/65536 , The reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 6554/65536, and the reel action 6 is determined with a probability of 6554/65536.

  Also, for example, reel action 1 is a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts rotating forward (normal rotation) after one step of reverse rotation. The reel action 3 is a symbol variation mode in which rotation (normal rotation) is started. The reel action 3 is a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts reverse rotation (normal rotation) after three stages of reverse rotation. This is a symbol variation mode in which the reel starts to rotate forward (normal rotation) after four stages of reverse rotation, and reel actions 5 and 7 start forward rotation (normal rotation) after each reel rotates five stages in reverse. It is a symbol variation mode, and the reel actions 6 and 8 can be a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts reverse rotation (normal rotation) after six steps of reverse rotation. The reel actions 5 and 6 are different in that the effect in the symbol variation mode is performed in the unit game, whereas the reel actions 7 and 8 are different in that the effect in the symbol variation mode is performed in the next unit game. Has become.

  As described later in the description of FIG. 51, if the reel action 3 or 4 is executed when the effect game state is the “main CZ state 1”, the effect game state is changed from the next unit game to the “main CZ state”. 74, and when the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2", the reel actions 5 to 8 are executed as described later in the description of FIG. Thus, the AT game is started from the next unit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the main CZ state, one reel action is determined and executed out of a plurality of reel actions having different stages of reverse rotation. The player's expectation at the time of execution can be improved in a stepwise manner, and the degree of the advantage is synchronized with the number of the reversely rotating step. The degree can be intuitively grasped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the value of the CZ game number counter is greater when the effect game state is “Main CZ state 1” and the value of the CZ game number counter is “1 to 7”. Is "8", the probability that the AT game is started (the probability that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is determined) is relatively higher. That is, since the number of continuous games in the CZ state is eight (see FIG. 51), the final game is configured to be most advantageous to the player in the main CZ state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 29, the probability that the AT game is started (reel) is higher when the effect game state is “main CZ state 2” than when the effect game state is “main CZ state 1”. The probability that any one of the actions 5 to 8 is determined) is relatively high. That is, in the main CZ state, the configuration is such that the player is more advantageous when the effect game state is “main CZ state 2” than when the effect game state is “main CZ state 1”. Have been.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the reel action 3 or 4 is executed in the main CZ state, the effect game state is shifted from the “main CZ state 1” to the “main CZ state 2”, and the “main CZ state 2” is set. In the “CZ state 2”, the probability that the AT game is started (the probability that one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is determined) is configured to be relatively high, so that the modes of the reel action are diversified. To prevent a decrease in expectation in the main CZ state even when a reel action (reel actions 5 to 8) at which an AT game is started is not determined. Can be.

  29 to 37, the internal winning combination “Replay” indicates “Normal Lips 1 to 4” and “Bell Lips 1 to 4”, and the internal winning combination “Bell” indicates “Middle left / right cross-up bell 1”. 3 "," Middle Right Left Cross Up Bells 1-3 "," Right Left Middle Middle Bells 1-3 "," Right Middle Left Middle Bells 1-3 "," Middle Left / Lower Lower Bells 1-3 "," Middle Right Left Lower " Bell 1 to 3 "," Right middle left lower bell 1 to 3 "and" Right middle left lower bell 1 to 3 ", and the internal winning combination" chance combination "is" chance lip 1 "," chance lip 2 "and The internal winning combination “watermelon” refers to “watermelon”, the internal winning combination “weak cherry” refers to “weak cherry”, and the internal winning combination “strong cherry” refers to “strong cherry”. 1) and "Strong Cherry 2", but are not limited to these. Alternatively, for example, reel action random determination may be performed for all or a part of the internal winning combinations shown in FIGS.

<Pseudo game frequency lottery table>
FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a pseudo game number lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. The pseudo game number lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during the pseudo probability change state described later in the description of FIG. 47. If the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 1” or “pseudo probability change state 2”, the pseudo game number Is used to determine

  As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the pseudo game number lottery table is based on whether the effect game state is “pseudo probable state 1” or “pseudo probable state 2” (type of pseudo probable state). , A lottery value is assigned so that any one of the pseudo game times 0 to 10 is determined.

  For example, when the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 1”, the number of pseudo game times 0 is determined at a probability of 164/256, the number of pseudo game times is determined at a probability of 40/256, and the number of pseudo games is determined at 40/256. With the probability, the number of pseudo game times is determined, with the probability of 6/256, the number of pseudo game times is determined with a probability of 6/256, and with the probability of 6/256, the number of pseudo game times is determined with 10.

  Further, for example, when the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 2”, the number of pseudo game times 0 is determined with a probability of 32/256, and the number of pseudo game times 2 is determined with a probability of 64/256. The number of pseudo games is determined three times with a probability of 256, the number of pseudo games is determined four with a probability of 64/256, the number of pseudo games is determined five with a probability of 16/256, and the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 16/256. 10 games are determined.

  If the number of pseudo games is determined to be one or more, a pseudo internal winning combination is determined as described later with reference to FIG. 74, and the AT number is added (added) based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. Will be done.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30, the probability that the number of pseudo games is given when the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 2” is higher than when the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 1”. Is relatively high. That is, in the pseudo probable state, the player is more advantageous when the effect game state is the “pseudo probable state 2” than when the effect game state is “the pseudo probable state 1”. Have been.

<Pseudo internal winning combination lottery table>
FIG. 30B is a diagram illustrating a pseudo internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. The pseudo internal winning combination lottery table is referred to in the pseudo probability change state lottery process described later in the description of FIG. 47 and the game start lock execution process described later in the description of FIG. Or "pseudo probability change state 2", and when the number of pseudo games is one or more, it is used to determine the pseudo internal winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 30B, in the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table, a weak cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 128/256, and a strong cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 64/256. The determination is made, and a lottery value is assigned so that a watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256, and a chance combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256.

  In addition, the pseudo internal winning combination is a pseudo game executed during the lock at the start of the game, and the reels 3L, 3L, and 3D are pseudo-based on the player's operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C and 17R (pseudo stop operation). This is used to stop 3C and 3R. For example, when a weak cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by a player, a symbol of “Cherry” is pseudo stop at a lower stage of the left reel 3L, a lower stage of the middle reel 3C, and an upper stage of the right reel 3R. Then, when a strong cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, a symbol of "Cherry" is pseudo stop at the lower part of the left reel 3L, the lower part of the middle reel 3C and the lower part of the right reel 3R. Then, when the watermelon is determined as the pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the symbol of “watermelon” is pseudo stopped at the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. When a chance combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by a player, a “replay” symbol is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C. Is stopped, the symbol "cherry" is controlled to stop pseudo the middle of the right reel 3R. From this, it can be said that the pseudo internal winning combination is a reel action.

<High-accuracy transfer lottery table>
FIG. 30C is a diagram showing a high-accuracy transition lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This high probability shift lottery table is referred to in a lottery process during a pseudo probability change state, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect game state is “pseudo probability change state 1”, does the transition to “pseudo probability change state 2” occur? Used to determine whether or not.

  As shown in FIG. 30C, when the internal winning combination is “replay”, the high probability shift lottery table maintains the current state with a probability of 255/256 (that is, does not shift to the “pseudo probability change state 2”). ) Is determined, and a high-probability transition (that is, a transition to “pseudo-probable change state 2”) is determined with a probability of 1/256, and a probability of 256/256 is obtained when the internal winning combination is “watermelon”. The lottery value is assigned so that the highly-probable transition (that is, the transition to the “pseudo-probable change state 2”) is determined with (ie, 100% probability).

<Highly secure game number lottery table>
FIG. 30D is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of high security failure games stored in the main ROM 52. This high security failure game number lottery table is referred to in a lottery process during a pseudo probability change state described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect game state shifts to the “pseudo probability change state 2”, in the “pseudo probability change state 2” Used to determine the number of unit games in which a pseudo game can be played (ie, the number of times a lock is executed during “pseudo probability change state 2” in the game start lock execution process described later with reference to FIG. 49). Can be

  As shown in (d) of FIG. 30, in the number-of-high-guaranteed-games lottery table, the number of high-guaranteed-failure games is determined to be three with a probability of 164/256, and the number of highly-secured games is determined to be four with a probability of 60/256. Is determined, and the lottery value is assigned so that the number of highly secure failure games is determined 5 with the probability of 24/256, and the number of highly secure failure games 10 is determined with the probability of 8/256.

<Pseudo probability change state end lottery table>
FIG. 30E is a diagram showing a pseudo probable change state end lottery table stored in the sub-ROM 82. This pseudo probability changing state end lottery table is referred to in a pseudo probability changing state process described later in the description of FIG. 71, and is a case where the effect game state is “pseudo probability changing state 1”, and is managed by the sub CPU 81. When the value of the pseudo probable change state management counter, which is the number of guaranteed games in the probabilistic change state 1, is "0", this is used to determine whether to end the pseudo probable change state.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (e), the pseudo probability change state end lottery table indicates that the probability change is completed with a probability of 8192/32768 when the internal winning combination is “replay” (that is, the “pseudo probability change state 1” is ended). Is determined, and the probability change continuation (that is, not to end the “pseudo probability change state 1”) is determined with a probability of 24576/32768, and when the internal winning combination is “bell”, a probability of 24576/32768 is determined. To determine the end of the probabilistic change (that is, to end the “pseudo-probable state 1”), and to determine the continuation of the probabilistic change (that is, not to end the “pseudo-probable state 1”) with a probability of 8192/32768. A value has been assigned.

  As will be described later in the description of FIG. 52, the “pseudo-probable change state 1” is actually ended based on winning of “Berlip”, but in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 When the above-described probable change end is determined, when any one of “normal lip 1 to 4” or “bell lip 1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, a stop operation sequence in which “bell lip” becomes a winning combination ( (See FIG. 19) to win "Berlip" and end the "pseudo-probable change state 1". On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo probability change state management counter is not “0”, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the probability change is continued, one of “normal lip 1 to 4” or “bell lip 1 to 4” is used as the internal winning combination. When it is determined that "Berlip" does not become a winning combination, the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 19) is notified so that "Berlip" does not win and "Pseudo probability change state 1" is continued. I have.

  However, the end and the continuation of the “pseudo probability change state 1” may be managed by the main CPU 51 similarly to the “pseudo probability change state 2”. Specifically, the main CPU 51 manages the pseudo probability changing state management counter, and based on the fact that the value of the pseudo probability changing state management counter has become “0”, the effect game state is changed from “pseudo probability changing state 1” to “AT State ".

<Fixed role reel action lottery table>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a reel action lottery table for fixed combination stored in the main ROM 52. This fixed action reel action lottery table is referred to in the normal game lottery process described later in the description of FIG. 48, and is displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when the internal winning combination is "fixed combination". It is used to determine a special reel action that is an effect according to the symbol variation mode. Note that the “determined combination” means a combination that determines that the AT game is started. In the present embodiment, “cherry lip”, “strong cherry lip”, and “strong bell” (see FIG. 17) ).

  As shown in FIG. 31, the reel action lottery table for the fixed combination is such that any one of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined based on which fixed combination is the internal winning combination. A lottery value is assigned.

  When the internal winning combination is “Cherry Lip”, the special reel action 1 is determined with a probability of 128/256, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 43/256, and the special reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 42/256. Is determined, and the special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 43/256.

  When the internal winning combination is “strong cherry lip”, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 85/256, and the special reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 86/256. The special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 85/256.

  When the internal winning combination is “strong bell”, the special reel actions 1 and 3 are not determined, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 128/256, and the special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 128/256. It is determined.

  Further, for example, the special reel action 1 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C rotate in reverse order, and the right reel 3R starts forward rotation (normal rotation) without reverse rotation. The reel action 2 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R rotate in the reverse order, and then start a forward rotation (normal rotation). The special reel action 3 is a left reel 3L. , The middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R in reverse order, and thereafter, all the reels are once again reverse-rotated once, and then the normal rotation (normal rotation) is started. This is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are rotated in reverse order, and then all the reels are again rotated twice to start forward rotation (normal rotation). It can be a thing.

  As shown in FIG. 31 and described later in the description of FIG. 74, when the special reel action 1 is determined, the addition fails, and the AT count (the value of the AT management difference number counter) is not added. If the special reel actions 2 to 4 are determined, the addition is successful, and the number of ATs according to the type of the special reel action is added. Specifically, when the special reel action 2 is determined, “300” is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter, and when the special reel action 3 is determined, the AT management difference number is determined. If "400" is added to the value of the counter and the special reel action 4 is determined, "500" will be added to the value of the AT management difference number counter.

  In this embodiment, the "Cherry" symbol is displayed on the left reel 3L regardless of whether the internal winning combination is "Cherry Lip" or the internal winning combination is "Strong Cherry Lip". When the stop button 17L is operated at the stop operation timing to be performed, the "Cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 3L, and stop control for "Cherry Lip A" winning is performed. On the other hand, the right reel 3R is configured such that the stop control is different between the case where the internal winning combination is “Cherry Lip” and the case where the internal winning combination is “Strong Cherry Lip”.

  Specifically, for example, when the “BAR” symbol is pressed on each reel and the internal winning combination is “strong cherry lip”, if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop operation timing, Each reel is stopped and displayed at the position of the symbol position data "12" in the middle of the left reel 3L, the position of the symbol position data "10" in the middle of the middle reel 3C, and the position of the symbol position data "13" in the middle of the right reel 3R. However, when the internal winning combination is “Cherry lip”, the symbol position data is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L even if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop operation timing. Although it can be stopped and displayed at the position of symbol position data "10" at the position of "12" and the middle of the middle reel 3C, it is stopped at the position of symbol position data "13" at the middle of the right reel 3R. And it is configured so that it can not be displayed.

  Here, when the internal winning combination is “strong cherry lip”, as described above, the special reel actions 2 to 4 are always determined, so that the success in addition is determined, whereas the internal winning combination is “ In the case of "cherry lip", as described above, since the special reel action 1 may be determined, the success or failure of the addition has a probability of 1/2, so that the internal winning combination is " Whether it is "strong cherry lip" or "cherry lip" is an event of high interest to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when at least the “BAR” symbol is pressed on each of the reels, the stop mode of the symbol stopped and displayed on each of the reels is changed so that the internal winning combination is “strong cherry”. It is configured such that it can be recognized whether it is "lip" or "cherry lip" before the special reel action is executed. With this configuration, the player who wants to quickly recognize the type of the fixed combination recognizes the type before the special reel action is executed by pushing the "BAR" symbol on each reel. You can do it. On the other hand, a player who wants to recognize whether the extra reel action has succeeded or not can dare to play the game with a higher sense of expectation by not performing the above-mentioned push. In other words, whether or not the addition is successful can be notified based on the notification mode and timing desired by the player, so that the notification of the addition can be performed according to the preference of the player.

<Mode suggestion effect lottery table>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a mode suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. This mode suggesting effect lottery table is referred to in a normal game process described later in the description of FIG. 72, and is used to determine a mode suggesting effect for indicating the determined mode in the first game after the end of the AT game. Used for

  As shown in FIG. 32, the mode suggestion effect lottery table has a lottery value such that any one of the mode suggestion effects 1 to 9 is determined based on which mode the current mode is. Have been assigned.

  When the current mode is “mode A”, mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 6552/32768, mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and mode suggestion effect 3 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768. Is determined, the mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768.

  When the current mode is “mode B”, mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 7476/32768, mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768. The effect 3 is determined, the mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, the mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 3276/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 3276/32768. The mode suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, and the mode suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 512/32768.

  When the current mode is “mode C”, mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 9728/32768, mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 8192/32768, and mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 4096/32768. The effect 3 is determined, the mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, the mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768. The mode suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, the mode suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 1024/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 9 is determined with a probability of 512/32768.

  Here, the mode is used for determining the next ceiling game number, as described later in the description of FIG. 73. Mode A is the most unfavorable mode for the player, and the probability that 1000 games are selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than in Mode B. Mode B is a more advantageous mode than mode A, and the probability that 240 games are selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than in mode A. The mode C is the most advantageous mode for the player, and 100 or less games are always selected as the number of ceiling games.

  That is, when the mode suggesting effects 6 to 8 are determined, it is determined that the current mode is the mode B or the mode C. When the mode suggesting effect 9 is determined, the current mode is determined. Is determined to be the mode C, so that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In addition, since the mode suggestion effect is performed in the first game after the end of the AT game, a decrease in the willingness to play due to the end of the AT game can be reduced.

<Remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a remaining game number suggestive effect lottery table stored in the sub-ROM 82. The remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the description of FIG. 72, and the number of remaining games until the AT game is started (that is, the ceiling game) for every 10 games in the normal game. The number of games up to the number) is used to determine a remaining game number suggestion effect for indicating the number of games.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table shows any remaining game number suggestion effect of any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 10 based on the range of the current remaining game number. A lottery value is assigned so as to be determined.

  For example, when the current remaining game number is “11-30” games, the remaining game number suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, The remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. The remaining game number suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 9 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and 9300/32768 is determined. The remaining game number suggestion effect 10 is determined based on the probability.

  For example, when the current remaining game number is the “31 to 50” game, the remaining game number suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. The remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. The remaining game number suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 9 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and 9300 / The remaining game number suggestion effect 10 is determined with a probability of 32768.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 33, when the remaining game number suggestion effect 1 is determined and executed, the remaining game number becomes the “1 to 10” game or the “11 to 30” game (that is, the remaining 30 games). (Within the game), and when the remaining game number suggestion effect 2 is determined and executed, the remaining game number is “31 to 50”, “51 to 100”, or “101 to 240” ( That is, when the remaining game number is determined to be 31 games or more and within 240 games, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 3 is determined and executed, the remaining game numbers are “1 to 10” and “11 to 30”. , "31 to 50", "51 to 100", or "101 to 240" (that is, the remaining 240 games or less). Players remaining games Less it (ie, the start of the next AT game to be close) can be directly recognized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33, when any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 8 to 10 is determined and executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the number of remaining games.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the probability that a specific remaining game number suggestion effect is executed in a certain remaining game number range is changed to a specific remaining game number suggestion effect in another remaining game number range. By increasing or lowering the probability that the game will be executed, the number of remaining games is reduced, and a plurality of specific remaining game number suggestion effects are executed. It is to add a new playability that allows the number of remaining games to be estimated.

  A specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of estimating the number of remaining games by the remaining game number suggesting effect in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  For example, the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is executed with a probability of 2000/32768 when the current remaining game number is in the range of “31 to 50” or “101 to 240”, and the current remaining game number is “ 241 to ", the game is executed with a probability of 300/32768, and when the game is within the range of other remaining games, the game is executed with a probability of 100/32768. When executed, it can be estimated that the number of remaining games is likely to be in the range of "31 to 50" or "101 to 240", but on the other hand, it may be in the range of "241 to" It can be guessed.

  In this case, if none of the remaining game number suggesting effects 4 to 7 is executed during the subsequent execution of the remaining game number suggesting effect, the remaining game number may still be in the range of “241 to”. Is high. On the other hand, when any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 4 to 7 is executed, as shown in FIG. 34, the range of the remaining game number is narrowed down according to the type of the executed remaining game number suggestion effect. It is possible to guess. In addition, when any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 3 is executed, it is possible to definitively recognize that the remaining game number is small as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the normal game, each time 10 games are played, the remaining game number suggestion effect is executed, so that the number of remaining games before the game can be shifted to the AT game is calculated. It is possible to add a new game property of guessing. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and to reduce a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of games in the normal game increases, the effect of suggesting the number of remaining games is executed more. , It is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in estimating the number of remaining games until the game can be shifted to the AT game, in some cases, it may be possible to estimate the number of remaining games by executing the remaining game number suggesting effect. In some cases, it can be estimated by executing the number suggestion effect, so that the interest of the remaining game number effect effect itself can be significantly improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the remaining game number suggestion effect is determined with the lottery probability as described above, it is necessary to estimate the remaining game number until the game can be shifted to the AT game. Can be prevented, and the game characteristics can be further diversified.

  It is desirable that the effect data relating to the remaining game number suggestive effects 4 to 7 be effect data having at least some relation to each other. For example, the effect data related to the remaining game number suggesting effect 4 is effect data displayed as “close?”, And the effect data related to the remaining game number suggesting effect 5 is displayed as “should be close ...”. The effect data relating to the remaining game number suggesting effect 6 is effect data displayed as "should be soon!", And the effect data relating to the remaining game number suggesting effect 7 indicates "immediately nearby." "!" Is displayed.

  Further, for example, the effect data relating to the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is effect data displayed as “Where is character A?”, And the effect data relating to the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is “place a or place b is present! ", and the effect data relating to the remaining game number suggesting effect 6 is effect data indicating" Let's find place a! " The effect data according to effect 7 may be effect data displayed as “Let's search for place b!”.

<Point during AT AT lottery table>
FIG. 35 is a view showing an AT point addition lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. The AT point addition lottery table is referred to in a start command receiving process described later in the description of FIG. 69, and when any of “Berlip 1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during an AT game, It is used to determine whether or not to accumulate points during AT.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the AT point addition lottery table, either maintenance (non-winning) or addition (winning) is determined based on the current point value (that is, the current value of the AT point counter). The lottery value is assigned so as to be executed.

  When the current point value is “0”, maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 26214/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 6554/32768. When the current point value is “1”, maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 27646/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 5120/32768.

  When the current point value is “2”, maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768. When the current point value is “3”, maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768.

<Lottery table for adding the number of ATs in the added state>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an AT number addition lottery table in the added state stored in the sub ROM 82. 70. This AT number addition lottery table in the additional state is referred to in an additional state process described later in the description of FIG. 70, and when the value of the later-added state point counter becomes “100” or more during the additional state. Are used to determine the AT number addition value which is a value to be added to the AT management difference number counter.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the additional state, the AT number addition lottery table determines the additional number of AT times based on the additional state management counter value indicating the number of games staying in the additional state. Is assigned a lottery value. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the AT-number addition lottery from being monotonous in the added state, and to maintain the interest of the game even when the state is repeatedly controlled to be in the added state.

  For example, when the added state management counter value is “9” (the first game in the added state except when the added state is introduced), the number of AT times is 50 sheets (AT management difference) with the probability of 29492/32768 as the AT number addition value. It is determined that "50" is added to the number counter, and the difference number 100 is added ("100" is added to the AT management difference number counter) as the AT number addition value with a probability of 3276/32768.

  Further, for example, when the added state management counter value is “5” (excluding when the added state is introduced, the added state is the fifth game), the difference between the number of AT times and the number of ATs is 20 sheets (AT management) with a probability of 20276/32768. The addition of "20" to the difference number counter is determined, and the difference number of 30 sheets (adding "30" to the AT management difference number counter) is determined as the AT number addition value with a probability of 8192/32768. , With the probability of 3276/32768, the difference number of 50 sheets (adding “50” to the difference number counter for AT management) is determined as the AT number addition value, and the difference number of 100 is added as the AT number addition value with the probability of 1024/32768. The number of sheets (adding “100” to the difference number counter for AT management) is determined.

  Also, for example, when the added state management counter value is “0” (the tenth game in the added state except when the added state is introduced), the number of AT times is 30 sheets as the AT number addition value with a probability of 24166/32768 (AT management). The addition of “30” to the difference number counter is determined, and the difference number of 50 sheets (adding “50” to the AT management difference number counter) is determined as the AT number addition value with a probability of 6554/32768. , 2048/32768, the AT number addition value (addition of “100” to the AT management difference number counter) is determined as the AT number addition value.

  In the present embodiment, difference number management is adopted as a method of managing the number of times of AT. Here, the difference number management means that when a medal is paid out by winning one of the small roles in the unit game, the medal inserted in the unit game is calculated from the payout number (for example, 7). The value (for example, 7−3 = 4) obtained by subtracting the number of inserted sheets (for example, 3) is subtracted from the difference number counter (for example, the AT management difference number counter), and the difference is calculated. When the value of the number counter becomes 0 or less, the AT game is ended.

  However, in the present embodiment, the AT management method is not limited to the difference number management described above. For example, a game number management method for managing the number of games in which an AT game is played, and a pushing role are used. Either a notification number management method for managing the number of times of notification, a set number management method for managing a predetermined number of games as one set, a continuation rate management method for managing a continuation rate at which an AT game is continued, or any of them. Combinations can also be employed. That is, in the case of "addition" of the "AT number", in addition to adding the difference number to the difference number counter, the number of games in which the AT game is performed is added, and the number of times that the pushing combination is notified is added, It shall include either adding the number of sets and resetting the continuation rate, or setting the continuation rate higher, or a combination thereof.

<Point addition lottery table during added state>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a point addition lottery table during the added state stored in the sub ROM 82. This point addition lottery table in the added state is referred to in an added state process described later in the description of FIG. 70, and determines the point added value which is a value added to the point counter in the added state for each game in the added state. Used for In addition, the point counter in the additional state, the point addition value is cumulatively added during the additional state, and when the value of the point counter in the additional state becomes "100" or more, the above-mentioned AT number is added and the additional state is performed again. Can be performed (continued) from the beginning.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the point addition lottery table in the added state is determined so that any one of the point addition values 1 to 100 is determined based on which internal winning combination is determined. A value has been assigned.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “replay”, one of the point addition values 1 to 5 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, and one of the point addition values 6 to 10 is determined with a probability of 1024/32768. , 819/32768, one of the point addition values 11 to 15 is determined, 163/32768, one of the point addition values 16 to 20 is determined, and the point addition value 21 to 81/32768 is determined with a probability of 81/32768. 32, one of the point addition values 34 to 36 is determined with a probability of 8/32768, and one of the point addition values 72 to 76 is determined with a probability of 2/32768. Any one of the point addition values 78 to 100 is determined based on the probability. Although the point addition values 37 to 72 are not described, it is assumed that any one of the lottery values including 0 is assigned.

  In addition, a first additional state and a second additional state are provided as additional states. In the first additional state, the point addition value is randomly determined using the point addition lottery table during the additional state shown in FIG. In the additional state, the point addition value may be randomly selected using the point addition lottery table in the additional state having different lottery values. In this case, the point addition lottery table in the additional state used in the second additional state assigns the lottery value such that the point addition value provided is relatively higher than the point addition lottery table in the additional state shown in FIG. In addition, in the point addition lottery table in the additional state shown in FIG. 37, the lottery value of “1” or more may be allocated to the point addition values 33 and 77 to which the lottery value “0” is allocated. With this configuration, the type of the added state can be notified by determining the predetermined point addition value.

[Configuration of Various Data Used for Reel Effect Control]
Next, configurations of various data used for reel effect control will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Data for reel effect selection>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of reel effect selection data stored in the main ROM 52. The reel effect selection data is data used for controlling an effect in a symbol variation mode according to the determined reel action in a reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG. 59.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the reel effect selection data is associated with the effect count and the excitation output selection data, or the effect phase end data, for each effect target reel.

  The number of effects is data that defines the number of times that the excitation output control is executed based on the associated excitation output table or the symbol position adjustment data. For example, if the number of effects is “32” and the effect excitation output table is “reverse rotation excitation output table”, the end code is calculated from the start address of the “reverse rotation excitation output table” (see FIG. 39). The excitation output control described above is defined as one time, and the control is performed 32 times.

  The excitation output selection data is data for selecting the type of the effect excitation output table or the type of the symbol position adjustment data. Actually, in the excitation output selection data, a data address indicating the location of the effect excitation output table or a data address indicating the location of the symbol position adjustment data is stored. Based on the data address, the effect excitation excitation is selected. The output table or the symbol position adjustment data will be read out, but for convenience, FIG. 38 shows that each table or data is directly stored.

  The effect phase end data is data for identifying the end of the reel effect (effect in a symbol variation mode) on the effect target reel. For example, when the reel effect selection data is “1” and the effect target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), when the excitation main force control using the hold excitation output table is executed ten times, the left reel 3L When the reel effect (effect in symbol variation mode) ends, the reel effect selection data is “2” and the effect target reel is “left” (left reel 3L). Is performed once, and after the excitation output control based on the symbol position adjustment data 2 is further performed 84 times, the reel effect (the effect in the symbol variation mode) for the left reel 3L is controlled to end. You.

  In this manner, by storing the number of effects, the selection data for excitation output, and the effect phase end data individually for each effect target reel (reel 3L, 3C, 3R), various reel effects (effects in symbol variation mode). ) Can be executed.

<Exciting excitation output table>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an effect excitation output table stored in the main ROM 52. This production excitation output table is based on excitation output selection data in the reel production control processing described later with reference to FIG. 59, or based on the result of the reel production adjustment output processing described later with reference to FIGS. It is used to output excitation data to a stepping motor.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the effect excitation output table, the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer or the end code are associated.

  The excitation direction data is data that defines the rotation direction of the reel (that is, the output order of pulses to the excitation phase in each stepping motor). For example, when the excitation phases of the stepping motor are A to D phases (four phases), the excitation direction data “forward rotation” is in the order of AB phase, BC phase, CD phase, and DA phase. The excitation data is output to control the reel to rotate forward (from the player's point of view, rotate from top to bottom), and the excitation direction data “reverse rotation” is the A-D phase. , DC phase, CB phase, and BA phase, the excitation data is output in this order, so that the reel is controlled to rotate in the reverse direction (from the player's point of view, rotate from bottom to top). The excitation direction data “hold” is controlled so as to maintain the reel stopped state by exciting all the phases A to D or excluding none of the phases A to D. Data.

  The effect excitation timer defines the value of the timer that is decremented by one in a timer update process (see S322 in FIG. 55) described later, and the end code is the excitation data of the excitation data in the excitation output table. This is data for identifying the end of output.

  That is, for example, when the “reverse rotation excitation output table” is set as the effect excitation output table, first, excitation data for rotating the reel in the reverse direction for two interrupts is output. Excitation data for rotating the reel in the reverse direction for two interrupts is output, and the control is terminated.

<Direction design position search data>
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect symbol position search data stored in the main ROM 52. The effect symbol position search data is a symbol position at the time of starting or ending the excitation output control in the reel effect (effect in the symbol variation mode) in the reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. This is data used for searching whether or not the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the effect symbol position search data, the number of searches and the effect symbol position search data are associated with each effect target reel in accordance with the type of reel action.

  The reel actions 1 to 8 are as described above. The reel action 9 is a reel action executed when the effect game state shifts to the “pseudo-probable change state 1” in the “during the AT state”, and the reel action 10 Is a reel action that is executed when the effect game state transitions to the “pseudo-probable change state 2” in the “AT state”. The reel action 11 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "weak cherry", the reel action 12 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "strong cherry", and the reel action 13 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "watermelon". The reel action 14 corresponds to a pseudo internal winning combination "chance combination".

  In addition, the reel action 9 is a reel action in which the symbols “Red 7” are finally aligned in the middle of each reel, and the reel action 10 is finally aligned with the symbols “Red 7” rising to the right in each reel. The reel action 11 is a reel action in which a “cherry” symbol is finally displayed on the lower part of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and on the upper part of the right reel 3R. Finally, the reel action is a reel action in which the "cherry" symbol is aligned in the lower row on each reel, and the reel action 13 is a reel action in which the "watermelon" symbol is finally aligned in the lower right on each reel. In the action 14, finally, a “Replay” symbol is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R "Cherry" symbols and has a reel action that is displayed in the middle.

  The number of searches is data that defines the number of times to search for the effect symbol position in the reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61. In other words, the number of searches is appropriate as the effect symbol position in the effect target reel. This is data indicating the number of symbol positions. For example, when the reel action is “9” and the production target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), the left reel 3L has one symbol position for displaying the “red 7” symbol in the middle (a symbol position). Since there is only position data 2), the number of searches is “1”, whereas the reel action is “12” and the effect target reel is “left” (left reel 3L). Since there are two symbol positions (symbol position data are 13 and 18) for displaying the "Cherry" symbol in the lower row, the number of searches is "2".

  In other words, when the symbol position adjustment data is halfway through the reel effect selection data, the effect symbol position search data is used as the symbol position when starting the excitation output control in the subsequent reel effect (effect in the symbol variation mode). Is used to search whether or not the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position, and the symbol position adjustment data is at the end of the reel effect selection data (more precisely, before the effect phase end data) Is used to search whether or not the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position as the symbol position when the excitation output control in the reel effect (effect in the symbol variation mode) is ended.

[Pachislot machine game flow]
Next, the flow of the game of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a game in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, as a state in which the player plays a game, an AT game which is an advantageous gaming state which is advantageous to the player, and a normal game which is relatively disadvantageous to the AT game. It is roughly divided into the normal game which is the state.

<Normal game>
The transition from the normal game to the AT game includes the fact that the number of games after the end of the AT game has reached the ceiling game number described above (ceiling game number consumption), that the above-mentioned determined combination has been won (determined combination winning), This is performed when the reel actions 5 to 8 are determined in the main CZ state (CZ success).

  Here, in the case of shifting from the normal game to the AT game due to the fixed-combination winning, first, the basic continuation number of the AT game is given based on the winning of the fixed combination (150 is added to the difference number counter for AT management). ) Is done. After that, as described above, the reel action (special reel actions 1 to 4) is determined according to the type of the determined combination, and the number of AT game addition continuations according to the determined reel action is given (the AT management difference number). 300, 400 or 500 is added to the counter).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning of the fixed combination is not limited to simply generating the AT game, but the reel action to be executed in the next game is determined based on the winning of the fixed combination, If the determined reel action is a specific reel action (special reel actions 2 to 4), the continuation number of the AT game is added based on the execution of the specific reel action. The feeling of expectation can be improved not only in the game that has been won or won in the fixed combination, but also in the next game.

  In the present embodiment, the basic continuation number is given based on the winning of the fixed combination, and the additional continuation number is given according to the determined reel action. Is not limited to this. For example, when the special reel action 1 is determined, the first continuation number is added as the basic continuation number (150 is added to the difference number counter for AT management), and when the special reel action 2 is determined, the basic continuation number is determined. Is added (300 is added to the AT management difference number counter), and when the special reel action 3 is determined, the third continuation number is added as the basic continuation number (AT management difference number counter). If the special reel action 4 is determined, a fourth continuation number may be added as the basic continuation number (500 is added to the AT management difference number counter). In this case, at the time of executing or ending the special reel action, if the basic continuation number given by the notification means is to be notified, not only the game that has won the winning combination or the winning, but also the next game. Expectation can be improved. Further, in this case, as the number of additional continuations, a right to continue the AT game again after the end of the AT game (that is, a right to continue the AT game for one set) may be given. Further, the number of rights for continuing the AT game may be determined by lottery.

  Further, the execution of the reel action based on the winning of the fixed combination may be performed not only during the normal game but also during the AT game. In this case, the number of basic continuations described above becomes the number of basic additions, and the number of addition continuations described above becomes the number of additional additions, which may be given to the player.

(Main CZ state)
In the normal game, “strong chance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and if any of “special lip A1 to 6” or “special lip B” is won (strong chance lip is established), the main CPU 51 controls. The effect game state shifts from the "normal game state" to the "main CZ state 1", and is in the main CZ state for eight games. Then, when the effect game state is the “main CZ state 1” or the “main CZ state 2” which shifts thereafter, a specific reel action (one of the reel actions 5 to 8) is determined and executed. The CZ is successful, and the normal game is shifted to the AT game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a chance zone state (main CZ state), which is a state in which it is easy to shift to the AT game, is derived under the control of the main CPU 51, and in this main CZ state, a plurality of reel actions ( Since a specific reel action (any of reel actions 5 to 8) among the reel actions 1 to 8) is determined and executed, the game is shifted to the AT game, so that only the lock is executed. As compared with the case, the sense of expectation in the chance zone state can be remarkably improved.

  The transition to the main CZ state may be performed not only during the normal game but also during the AT game. In this case, a specific reel action (one of reel actions 5 to 8) is determined from a plurality of reel actions (reel actions 1 to 8), and a predetermined number of ATs is determined based on the execution. May be provided to the user. Further, the number of ATs to be provided may be changed according to the type of a specific reel action (any of reel actions 5 to 8).

<AT games>
When the game shifts to the AT game, a stop operation procedure which is advantageous to the player is notified until the value of the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less (the AT count is exhausted), and the stop is performed according to the notification. By performing the operation, the player can increase the number of medals.

  In the AT game, if any of “Berlip 1 to 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the points during the AT are cumulatively added if the lottery of the points during the AT is won. Then, when the four points during the AT are added (the value of the point counter during the AT becomes 4), the AT game is continued again even when the number of ATs is exhausted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, there are provided two types of states in which the number of ATs (the value of the difference number counter for AT management) can be added during the AT game, that is, an additional state and a pseudo-probable state. .

(Added state)
In the AT game, if “BAR lip 1” or “BAR lip 2” is determined as an internal winning combination, and the first stop operation is performed on a portion other than the left reel 3L to win any of the won replays, the sub CPU 81 The state shifts to the additional state by the control of. This additional state continues for 12 games per set. In the first game (the value of the additional state management counter is 11) and in the second game (the value of the additional state management counter is 10), the additional state is used when the additional state is introduced. Is executed, and the lottery is executed. The third to twelfth games (the value of the additional state management counter is 9 to 0)
In, the lottery of the point in the added state is executed. When the value of the point counter during the additional state is equal to or more than “100”, the point is increased according to the game in the additional state in which the value of the point counter during the additional state is equal to or more than “100”. The AT count (the value of the AT management difference number counter) is determined, and the additional state can be performed again from the beginning (set continues).

  In the added state, the value of the AT management difference number counter is not decremented even if a small win is won, and a stop operation procedure that is most advantageous to the player is notified for the push small win. Therefore, if the added state itself continues, the number of ATs is added, and the number of medals also increases.

  In the additional state, the predetermined number which is the value of the point counter during the additional state for continuing the additional state is defined as “100”, and the points in the additional state exceeding the predetermined number “100” are determined. If acquired, the surplus will be carried over to the next additional state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the AT game, a specific start condition is satisfied (for example, “BAR lip 1” or “BAR lip 2” is determined as an internal winning combination, and other than the left reel 3L). By performing the first stop operation, if any of the won replays is won and the added state is completed for two games, a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining ten games are completed or added). Is maintained in the above-mentioned state until the above state is continued). The additional state also functions as a state for increasing the number of ATs, and also functions as a state for increasing the number of medals. Therefore, even if the number of ATs cannot be increased, the player is not required to increase the number of ATs. By surely enjoying the benefit of the increase, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing. In addition, when the added state continues, the points in the added state that are cumulatively added during the added state can be carried over. The expectation of the lottery can be further improved.

  The transition to the additional state may be performed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, the transition to the AT game may be made based on the fact that the value of the point counter during the additional state has become “100” or more. Alternatively, the number of ATs to be initially given may be changed according to the number of games in the additional state in which the value of the point counter during the additional state has become “100” or more.

(Pseudo probability change state)
In the AT game, any one of “Bell Lips 1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, and when a transition to the pseudo-probable change state is won, a specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed, and the main CPU 51 is executed. Is shifted to the pseudo-probable change state by the control of. In this pseudo probability change state, the number of pseudo games when the game start lock is executed once is determined, and the determined number of pseudo games can be performed. In determining the number of pseudo games, a plurality of pseudo games can be determined.

  Here, the pseudo game includes an operation on a bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) locked at the start of the game (pseudo insertion operation), an operation on a start lever (start lever 16) (pseudo start operation), By determining the pseudo internal winning combination and performing an operation (pseudo stop operation) on the stop button (stop button 17L, 17C, 17R), the progress is controlled, and the game is played as if it were a normal game. It can impress the player as if it were proceeding. In the present embodiment, the determination of the pseudo internal winning combination is made based on the pseudo start operation, similarly to the determination of the internal winning combination in the normal game, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed based on a pseudo insertion operation or a pseudo stop operation (particularly, a pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation). In addition, the pseudo insertion operation, the pseudo start operation, and the pseudo stop operation are collectively referred to as “pseudo game operation”. For convenience of explanation, an operation on a bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) in a normal game (normal insertion operation), an operation on a start lever (start lever 16) in a normal game (normal start operation), a normal operation Operations (normal stop operations) on the stop buttons (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) in the game are collectively referred to as “normal game operations”.

  Then, in the pseudo probability variation state, an extra lottery is performed based on the determined internal winning combination and the number of ATs (the value of the AT management difference number counter), and the AT number (based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination) is determined. An additional lottery is performed (the value of the AT management difference number counter).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the pseudo probable change state, not only the chance of adding the number of ATs based on the internal winning combination but also the opportunity of adding the lot of ATs based on the pseudo internal winning combination is provided. Therefore, during one unit game, it is possible to expect a plurality of additional lotteries, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the additional. Also, in a pachislot machine, usually, an upper limit is set for the number of medals to be paid out in one unit game (for example, 15), and furthermore, a prescribed time required for one unit game is set. Although it is set (for example, 4.1 seconds from the start operation of the previous game to the start operation of the current game), the use of the pseudo game does not violate these rules and is shorter than the specified time, for example. Since a plurality of lotteries can be generated in time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the additional lottery state which is advantageous to the player in the pseudo probability change state.

  In the pseudo probability variation state, the “pseudo probability variation state 1” (first mode) and the “pseudo probability variation state 1” (first mode) in which a relatively larger number of pseudo games are determined than “pseudo probability variation state 1” (first mode) There is a “probable change state 2” (second mode), and the “pseudo probable change state 1” (first mode) is changed from “pseudo probable change state 1” based on satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition (for example, winning of a high-probability transition lottery). The state shifts to the “pseudo probability change state 2” (second mode). In the “pseudo probability changing state 2” (second mode), when a pseudo game is executed, the number of pseudo games is always determined to be two or more (see (a) of FIG. 30). In addition, it is possible to enjoy a plurality of additional lottery opportunities based on the number of ATs based on the pseudo internal winning combination, and it is possible to diversify the additional lottery state that is advantageous to the player, which is a pseudo probability change state.

  In addition, the transition from the “pseudo-probable change state 2” (second mode) to the “pseudo-probable change state 1” (first mode) is based on the number of times that the pseudo game was actually performed (the number of high security failure games). Therefore, it is possible to surely enjoy the chance of adding the number of ATs based on the pseudo game in the “pseudo-probable change state 2” (second mode).

  In the present embodiment, any one of “Bell Lips 1 to 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition to the pseudo probability change state is won, and a specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed. Then, the transition to the pseudo-probable change state is made, but the transition to the pseudo-probable change state is not limited to this. For example, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not to shift to the pseudo-probable state, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, one of the normal lip 1 to 4) is controlled by the sub CPU 81. At the time of winning, a predetermined stop operation order (for example, a stop operation order in which "Berlip" is won) is notified, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination relating to "Berlip") is displayed. The main CPU 51 may shift the effect game state to the “pseudo probability change state 1” based on the predetermined number of times (for example, three times), thereby shifting to the pseudo probability change state.

  In this case, the predetermined stop operation sequence includes a first predetermined stop operation sequence (for example, “middle right and left” in “normal lip 1” and “middle left and right” in “normal lip 3”). , A second predetermined stop operation sequence (for example, “middle right left” for “normal lip 1” and “middle right left” for “normal lip 3”), and the sub CPU 81 It is determined in advance which of the first predetermined stop operation sequence and the second predetermined stop operation sequence is to be notified, and based on the stop operation performed in the second predetermined stop operation sequence, the predetermined predetermined stop operation sequence is notified. If the number of times the symbol combination is displayed is equal to or more than a specific number of times (for example, two times), the main CPU 51 shifts the effect game state to the “pseudo probability change state 2”. , And to shift the production game state to “pseudo probability change state 1” It may be. Alternatively, while a predetermined symbol combination is displayed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined specific order (for example, a second predetermined stop operation sequence → a first predetermined stop operation sequence → a second predetermined stop) (Order of operation order), based on whether or not a game in which the stop operation is performed according to the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order is performed, the effect game state is set to the “pseudo probability change state 1”. Or "pseudo-probable change state 2". In these cases, the sub CPU 81 may determine which of the first predetermined stop operation sequence and the second predetermined stop operation sequence is to be notified by lottery for each unit game. Furthermore, when it is determined by lottery for each unit game whether to notify the first predetermined stop operation sequence or the second predetermined stop operation sequence, a specific internal winning combination (for example, watermelon) At the time of winning, the state in which the second predetermined stop operation order is difficult to be notified may be promoted to a state in which the second predetermined stop operation order is easily notified.

  The transition to the pseudo probability change state may be executed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, the AT game or the lottery transition to the main CZ state is performed based on the determined internal winning combination, and the AT game or the main lottery transition to the main CZ state is determined based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. May be performed.

[Main control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the main control processing. The main control process described below is started when the pachislot machine 1 is turned on.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 51 executes a power-on process shown in FIG. 43 (S10). In the power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal, the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization process according to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes an initialization process at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area, the display combination storing area, and the like of the main RAM 53 are cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 44 (S12). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process of detecting a medal inserted by the player and a process of detecting a start operation are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S13). Here, the random number value is a value used for the internal lottery processing (hereinafter, random number value 1) and a value used for the lock lottery processing (hereinafter, random number value 2). , 0-65535.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes an internal lottery process shown in FIG. 45 (S14). The main CPU 51 executing the internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a lock lottery process shown in FIG. 46 (S15). In the lock lottery process, a lottery for determining whether or not to perform the above-described “lock”, a transition lottery for a transition to an effect game state, and the like are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel stop initialization process (S16). By the reel stop initial setting process, various stop control information of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 53 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated start command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S17). The start command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the game state flag, the type of the effect game state, the type of the lock and the period thereof, and the bonus end number counter value. is there.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a wait process (S18). In this wait process, it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the last game start (previous unit game start), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. The waiting time to wait is exhausted. The predetermined time in the wait process, that is, the wait time is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49 (S19). In the lock execution process, based on the lottery result in the lock lottery process in S15, a lock at the start of the game, a reel action during the execution of the lock, and the like are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel rotation start process for rotating all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S20). With the reel rotation start processing, “01110000” is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 26). The rotation start control of the reel is executed by an interruption process shown in FIG. 55 (more specifically, a reel control process shown in FIG. 58). This interrupt process is a process that is periodically executed at regular intervals (1.1172 ms).

  By this interruption processing, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts. Then, by this interrupt processing, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is accelerated until the rotation reaches a constant speed.

  Furthermore, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed, the drive of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled by this interrupt processing, so that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant speed. Will be maintained. When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed and the above-described reel index is detected, the stop operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is permitted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates reel rotation start command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 ( S21). The reel rotation start command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has started, for example.

  By receiving the reel rotation start command data, the sub-control circuit 42 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel stop control process (S22). The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped by the reel stop control process. Although not shown, in the reel stop control process, the main CPU 51 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the main RAM 53. It is stored in the allocated communication data storage area. The reel stop command data includes the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position (that is, the symbol position when the stop button is operated), the number of sliding pieces, or the expected stop position (that is, the actual stop of the reel). (Symbol position) and the like are data that the sub CPU 81 can recognize.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a winning search process (S23). In this winning search process, after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line and the symbol combination table are collated to identify the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line. You.

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 23) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 14) are collated, and if there is a match as a result of the collation. The data corresponding to the matched symbol combination (display combination) is stored in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 22), and the payout number (payout number counter value) associated with the symbol combination is acquired.

  Next, as a result of the winning search process, the main CPU 51 executes a medal payout process for paying out a number of medals according to the acquired payout number counter value (S24). In the medal payout process, the control of the hopper drive circuit 65 and the update of the number of credits are performed based on the payout number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a state management process shown in FIG. 51 (S25). In this state management process, the transition control of the effect game state is executed based on the type of the executed reel action, the type of the winning combination, and the like, and the on / off of the output of the external signal from the external central terminal board described above. Is managed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a game end lock execution process shown in FIG. 54 (S26). In the game end lock execution process, a lock at the end of the game and the like are executed based on predetermined execution conditions.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated winning operation command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S27). . The winning operation command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the type of display combination, the payout number counter value, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a bonus end check process (S28). By the bonus end check process, a process of ending the operation of the BB when the end condition of the BB is satisfied is executed.

  In the bonus end check processing, specifically, the present payout number counter value is subtracted from the bonus end number counter value stored in the bonus operation check processing described later, and it is determined whether or not the value has become a negative value. When it is determined that the value has become a negative value, the BB end time process is executed. In the BB end processing, the BB game state flag and the RB game state flag are turned off, and the game state is shifted to the RT0 game state.

  Although not shown, in the bonus end check processing, the main CPU 51 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated bonus end command data in the main RAM 53. It is stored in the allocated communication data storage area. The bonus end command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize that BB has ended, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a bonus operation check process (S29). By the bonus operation check process, a process of operating the BB or the like based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is executed. After executing the process of step S29, the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S11.

  In the bonus operation check process, specifically, first, it is determined whether the display combination is BB. Then, when it is determined that the display combination is BB, a process at the time of BB operation is executed. In the process at the time of BB operation, the BB game state flag and the RB game state flag are turned on, and “75” is set as the value of the bonus end number counter. Also, the carryover combination storage area is cleared (the value of bit 0 is reset to “0”). Next, when it is determined that the display combination is not BB, it is determined whether the display combination is a replay. Then, when it is determined that the display combination is a replay, an automatic insertion request is made. That is, control is performed so that the number of inserted cards (three) in the current unit game is automatically inserted in the next unit game. If it is determined that the display combination is not a replay, the process ends.

  Although not shown, in the bonus operation check process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated bonus start command data in the main RAM 53. It is stored in the allocated communication data storage area. The bonus start command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize that BB has started, for example.

<Process at power-on>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed in step S10 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S30). In this determination processing, it is determined whether or not the backup is normal by error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 51 stores the set values and the like of the pachislot machine 1 when the power is turned off and the checksum value calculated from the set values and the like in the main RAM 53 as backup data, and performs the determination process when the power is turned on (S30). , The set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 53 are read.

  Then, the main CPU 51 compares the checksum calculated from the read setting values and the like with the backed up checksum, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison results match.

  When determining that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the backup set values and the like in the main RAM 53 (S31). Thus, when the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 53.

  After executing the processing in step S31, or when it is determined in step S30 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 51 uses a setting change switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1. ) Is turned on (S32). Here, when determining that the setting change switch is ON (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an initialization process at the time of setting change (S33).

  In the initialization process at the time of the setting change, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area, the symbol code storage area, and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 53 are cleared, and the set values are cleared. The data stored in the carryover combination storage area may not be cleared, or may be cleared.

  In the initialization process at the time of the setting change, the data stored in the effect game state storage area is cleared, and the high security failure game number counter and the CZ game number counter are cleared. Then, "normal gaming state" is set as the effect gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S34). . The initialization command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize the presence or absence of a change in the set value, the set value, and the like, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a setting value changing process (S35). In this set value changing process, a set value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of a reset switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1, and subsequently, The set value selected when the start lever 16 was operated is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the setting change switch is on (S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until a determination result that the setting change switch is not on is obtained.

  Here, when the determination result that the setting change switch is not on is obtained (that is, when the setting change switch is turned off from on) (NO), the main CPU 51 sends the sub control signal from the main control circuit 41. Initialization command data to be transmitted to the circuit 42 is generated, the generated initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S37), and the power-on processing ends.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S32 that the setting change switch is not on (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the backup is normal (S38). If it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 51 executes power-on error processing (S39).

  In the power-on error processing, the main CPU 51 displays that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like. Note that the main CPU 51 does not release the error state by operating the stop release switch (not shown) or the reset switch (not shown) in a state where the backup is not normal (backup error). Thus, the error state is released only when a new setting is changed.

  If it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 51 restores the state of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the state before power-off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 53. (S40), the power-on processing ends.

<Medal acceptance / start check processing>
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S50). That is, it is determined whether or not a replay has been won in the previous unit game.

  If it is determined in step S50 that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting medals of the same number as medals inserted in the previous unit game (S51). Specifically, the main CPU 51 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53. A transmission process is performed (S52). Here, the medal insertion command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the inserted number counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like, for example.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), the main CPU 51 permits acceptance of medals (S53). For example, the main CPU 51 drives a solenoid (not shown) of the selector 35 to form a path so that medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 can pass through the inside of the selector 35.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the reception of medals has been prohibited from the previous unit game, and therefore, the processing related to the reception of medals is performed. Is not executed, but even if a replay has been won in the previous unit game, acceptance of medals may be permitted.

  After the processing of step S52 or S53 is executed, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the inserted number in the main RAM 53 according to the gaming state (S54). In the present embodiment, 3 is set as the maximum value of the inserted number in any game state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (S55). Here, when it is determined that the reception of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether medals are properly inserted or whether the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B is operated. Is executed (S56). In the medal insertion check process, when a medal is properly inserted, or when a medal is inserted by operating the MAX bet button 15A or the 1 BET button 15B from credit, according to the number of inserted medals, The value of the inserted number counter or the value of the credit counter is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53. A transmission process is performed (S57).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal insertion or a credit is possible (S58). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the insertion number counter is 3 and the value of the credit counter is 50, or that the automatic insertion process of step S51 is executed. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined that medal insertion or credit is not possible, and when the condition is not satisfied, it is determined that medal insertion or credit is possible.

  If it is determined in step S58 that the insertion of medals or the credit is not possible (NO), the main CPU 51 prohibits the reception of medals (S59). For example, the main CPU 51 forms a path such that medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 are discharged from the medal payout port 24 without driving the solenoid of the selector 35.

  In step S55, when it is determined that the reception of medals is not permitted (NO), in step S58, it is determined that medals can be inserted or credits are possible (YES), or after the processing of step S59 is performed. The main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is a number at which a game can be started. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is 3, which is the maximum value (S60).

  Here, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, when determining that the number of inserted medals is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch 16S is on (S61).

  Here, when it is determined that the start switch 16S is not turned on (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, when determining that the start switch 6S is ON (YES), the main CPU 51 prohibits the reception of medals (S62) and ends the medal reception / start check process.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state in the main RAM 53 (S70). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 sets one of the internal lottery tables shown in FIG. 15 or FIG. 16 in the main RAM 53 according to the gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S71). The random number value acquired here is the random number value 1. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to a predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S70, obtains one lottery value corresponding to each winning number of the corresponding setting value, and obtains one lottery value from the random number value. Is subtracted (S72). That is, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not the internal winning combination associated with the winning number is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the subtraction in the process of step S72 is less than 0 (S73). Here, when determining that the subtraction result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S74).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers in the used internal lottery table have been checked (S75), and when it is determined that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO). , And the process returns to step S72.

  On the other hand, when determining that all the winning numbers have been checked (YES), the main CPU 51 sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S76). In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is set so that the subtraction result does not become 0 or more when the main CPU 51 finishes checking all the winning numbers. Step S76 is not executed except in the case of (RB gaming state).

  In step S73, if the main CPU 51 determines that the subtraction result is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the internal lottery table set in the main RAM 53 and determines the small combination / replay data pointer from the winning number based on the winning number. The value and the value of the bonus data pointer are obtained (S77).

  After executing the processing of step S76 or S77, the main CPU 51 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 17) and sets the internal winning combination based on the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer. Is acquired (S78).

  In the process of step S78, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and 27 bytes indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the small combination / replay data pointer acquired in the process of step S76 or S77. Is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the internal winning combination acquired in step S78 in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 21) (S79). In the process of step S79, a 27-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S78 is stored in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 27.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S80). If the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18) and determines the internal combination based on the value of the bonus data pointer. A winning combination is acquired (S81).

  In the process of step S81, the internal winning combination determination table for bonus is referred to, and a 27-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the data pointer for bonus acquired in the process of step S76 or S77 is determined. You.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S81 in the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 24) (S82). In the process of step S82, when “BB” is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S81, bit 0 corresponding to “BB” in the carryover storage area is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S83). In this determination processing, it is determined whether or not the bit 0 corresponding to “BB” in the carryover combination storage area is set to “1” in step S82.

  If it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination is “BB” (S84). Here, when determining that the internal winning combination is “BB” (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (S85). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets “1” to the RT1 gaming state flag. In the present embodiment, since the bonus combination is only “BB”, the determination process may not be performed.

  If it is determined in step S80 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), if it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), the internal winning combination is determined to be “BB” in step S84. Is determined (NO) or after executing the processing of step S85, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S86). .

<Lock lottery process>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the lock lottery process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (S90). Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the RT1 gaming state flag. When determining that the gaming state is not the RT1 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock lottery process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the “at-AT state” (S91). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the “at-AT state” (NO), the main CPU 51 executes a normal game lottery process (S102), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 48, and ends the lock lottery process.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S91 that the effect gaming state is the “AT-in-progress state” (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect gaming state is “pseudo-probable change”. It is determined whether the state is “state 1” or “pseudo probability change state 2” (S92). When it is determined that the effect game state is the “pseudo-probable state 1” or the “pseudo-probable state 2” (YES), a lottery process in the pseudo probable state (S93) described later with reference to FIG. The lock lottery process ends.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S92 that the effect game state is not the “pseudo-probable state 1” or the “pseudo-probable state 2” (NO), then the internal winning combination of any of Bell Lips 1 to 4 is determined. Is determined (S94). If the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is any of Bell Lips 1 to 4 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a pseudo probability change state lottery based on the random number value 2 (S95).

  In the pseudo probability changing state lottery, for example, a lottery is executed such that a transition to the pseudo probability changing state is won with a probability of 512/65536 and a transition to the pseudo probability changing state is not won with a probability of 65024/65536. .

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the pseudo probability changing state lottery is a winning (S96). If it is determined that the result of the pseudo-probability changing state lottery is not a winning (non-winning) (NO), the lock lottery process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the result of the pseudo probability changing state lottery is a win (YES), the main CPU 51 randomly determines the reel action 9 or 10 based on the random number 3 (S97). In the process of step S97, for example, the reel action 9 is determined with a probability of 192/256, and the reel action 10 is determined with a probability of 64/256.

  Here, the random number value 3 is different from the random number value 1 and the random number value 2 and is a random number value that is separately generated and acquired each time it becomes necessary in various processes in the main control process. Note that the random value 3 may be a value obtained by acquiring the random value generated by the random number generator 56 and stored in the random value storage area, similarly to the random value 1 and the random value 2. The information may be acquired by using a latch circuit (not shown) when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, when various switches such as the start switch 16S are turned on or off).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “pseudo-probable change state 1” or “pseudo-probable change state 2” as the effect game state according to the type of reel action (S98). For example, if the determined reel action is reel action 9, “pseudo probability change state 1” is set as the effect game state, and if the determined reel action is reel action 10, “pseudo probability change state” is set as the effect game state. 2 ”is set.

  Next, when the “pseudo-probable change state 2” is set as the effect game state, the main CPU 51 sets the number of games with high security failure 5 to the number of games with high security failure (S99), and ends the lock lottery process. I do.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S94 that the internal winning combination is not one of the bell lips 1 to 4 (NO), then the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip. (S100). When determining that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a lottery in an additional lock push order based on the random number value 2 and stores the lottery result (S101). The lock lottery process ends. Also, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock lottery process.

<Lottery processing during pseudo probability change state>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the lottery processing in the pseudo probability changing state executed in step S93 of the lock lottery processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change state 2” (S200). When determining that the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change state 2” (YES), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S206.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the “pseudo-probability state 2” (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the high-probability transition lottery table shown in FIG. The transition state is determined (S201).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not high-accuracy transition is performed, that is, whether or not highly-accurate transition is determined as a transition state (S202). When the main CPU 51 determines that the high-accuracy transition has not been determined as the transition state (the maintenance of the current state has been decided) (NO), the process proceeds to step S206.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the high-probability transition has been determined as the transition state (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the high security failure game number random determination table shown in FIG. Then, the number of high security failure games is determined (S203).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the number of highly secured failure games determined in step S203 to the number of highly secured failure games counter (S204), and sets “pseudo probability variation state 2” as the effect game state (S205). .

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo game number lottery table shown in (a) of FIG. 30 and determines whether the random number value 3 and the type of the pseudo probable state, that is, whether the effect game state is “probable probable state 1”. The number of pseudo games is determined based on whether the state is the "pseudo probability change state 2" (S206), and the number of pseudo games determined in step S206 is set in the pseudo game number counter (S207).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S208). When determining that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. Is determined (S209), and the lottery process in the pseudo probability changing state is terminated. Also, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery process during the pseudo probability change state.

<Lottery processing during normal game>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a normal game lottery process executed in step S102 of the lock lottery process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a fixed combination (S220). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination is a cherry lip, a strong cherry lip, or a strong bell. If the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is the fixed combination (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the fixed combination reel action lottery table shown in FIG. 31 and executes the next game based on the random number 3. Then, the type of the special reel action (one of the special reel actions 1 to 4) is determined (S221), and the lottery process during the normal game is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not the determined combination (NO), subsequently, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the main CZ state, that is, the effect gaming state is “main CZ state 1” or “ It is determined whether or not the state is “main CZ state 2” (S222). When determining that the effect game state is not “Main CZ state 1” or “Main CZ state 2” (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the normal game lottery process.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S222 that the effect game state is the “main CZ state 1” or the “main CZ state 2” (YES), then the reel action 7 or 8 is set. It is determined whether or not there is (S223). When determining that the reel action 7 or 8 is set (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the normal game lottery process.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S223 that the reel action 7 or 8 is not set (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the reel action random determination table for the main CZ state shown in FIG. The effect game state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2”), the CZ game number counter value (the number of the game in the main CZ state), and the random number value 2 Then, one of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined (S224).

  Next, the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the CZ game number counter (S225), and ends the normal game lottery process.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, the effect gaming state is the “normal gaming state” and the internal winning combination is the pressing order small combination (the small combination / replay data pointer is , "17" to "40"), if the stop button 17L is not operated in the first stop operation, the normal game lottery process is performed for a predetermined game (for example, 10 games). It is good also as a structure (that is, "penalty" is given) so that it may not be performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a profit that is not intended by the developer of the pachislot machine and the gaming arcade from being given to the player.

<Lock start processing at game start>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in step S19 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a special reel action has been determined (S110). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the special reel actions 1 to 4 has been determined in the above-described normal game lottery process in the previous game. If it is determined that the special reel action has been determined (YES), an effect timer according to the type of the special reel action is set (S111), and the process proceeds to step S114. In the process of step S111, for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined, “3581” (about 4 seconds) is set as the staging timer, and when the special reel action 4 is determined, By setting "13427" (about 15 seconds) as the effect timer, control is performed so that the lock is executed while the special reel action is executed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not a reel action has been determined (S112). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the reel actions 1 to 8 has been determined in the above-described normal game lottery process in the previous game or the current game. If it is determined that a reel action has been determined (YES), an effect timer corresponding to the type of reel action is set (S113). In the process of step S113, for example, when reel action 1 is determined, “1791” (about 2 seconds) is set as the staging timer, and when reel action 6 or 8 is determined, "8951" (about 10 seconds) is set as a production timer.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated lock command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S114). The start lock execution process ends. Here, the lock command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize the value of the effect timer, the type of the special reel action, the type of the reel action, the type of the pseudo internal winning combination, and the like.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S112 that the reel action has not been determined (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S115). When determining that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the game start lock execution process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), the pseudo game effect timer is set (S116). Here, the value of the effect timer (for example, “26853” (about 30 seconds)) determined in advance as being necessary for each time of the pseudo game is set in the pseudo game effect timer.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (S117). Specifically, in S209 of the lottery process during the pseudo probability changing state, it is determined whether or not the pseudo internal winning combination has already been determined. When determining that the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (YES), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S119. If the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. A pseudo internal winning combination is determined (S118).

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates the above-described lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S119). A pseudo game process (S120) described later in the description of FIG. 50 is executed, and the pseudo game number counter is decremented by 1 (S121).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S122). When determining that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S116.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a random delay process (S123) and ends the game start lock execution process.

(Random delay processing)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo game process described later in the description of FIG. 50 ends, the reels 3L, 3C are executed by the reel rotation start process executed in step S20 of the main control process shown in FIG. The original rotation of the 3R is started. For example, after the execution of the lock at the start of the game after the “watermelon” symbol alignment is pseudo-stopped, the reels 3L, The original rotation of the 3C and 3R is started, and there is a possibility that the adjustment may impair the fairness of the game. This is because there may be a possibility that the player can easily grasp the timing of the stop operation by performing the effect (for example, the pseudo game) by the reel, and if no action is taken, the effect by the reel is not intended. This is because, without doing so, the eyesight assisting function would be provided.

  Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment is in a state where a predetermined symbol is displayed (in the above-described example, a state where “watermelon” symbols are aligned) at the end of execution of the game start lock. In this case, a predetermined random number (for example, random number 3) is obtained for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a timer is set based on the obtained random number. Reel rotation start is randomly delayed.

  With such a configuration, even in the case of performing an effect by a reel (for example, a pseudo game), there is no possibility that the adjustment will impair the fairness of the game, and the game is started (the original rotation of the reel is started). ).

<Pseudo game processing>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game process executed in step S120 of the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49.

  First, the main CPU 51 detects the reel index for each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the above-described reel position detection circuit 63 (S129). That is, the main CPU 51 starts the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (hereinafter, pseudo rotation) for the purpose of performing the pseudo game by the reel effect control processing described later in the description of FIG. Symbol positions of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R can be detected.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a stop operation (pseudo-stop operation) has been performed on a reel that can be pseudo-stopped (S130). That is, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R during the pseudo rotation are operated.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation has been performed on the reels that can be pseudo-stopped (YES), the reels are pseudo-stopped at the pseudo stop positions corresponding to the determined pseudo internal winning combination (S131). For example, when a watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination, when a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, a symbol “watermelon” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. Pseudo stop.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets pseudo stopped state holding data according to the type of the reel that has been pseudo stopped (S132). Thereby, for example, in the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, control is performed such that rotation in the reverse rotation direction and rotation in the forward rotation direction are performed alternately at different timings. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the pseudo stop appear to vibrate in the vertical direction, so that the reels stop by the pseudo stop control and the normal stop control. It is possible to prevent confusion with stopping each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is a reel that can be pseudo-stopped (S133). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is still spinning. When it is determined that there is a reel that can be pseudo-stopped (YES), the process returns to step S130, and when it is determined that there is no reel that can be pseudo-stopped (NO), the process proceeds to step S136.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation has not been performed on the reel that can be pseudo-stopped in step S130 (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S134). . When it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the process returns to step S130, and when it is determined that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the determined pseudo internal winning combination is determined. Is set (S135), and the routine goes to the processing of step S138.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of performing a pseudo game, and when the player does not operate the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, the determined pseudo internal winning combination is determined. The reel action is set and the reel is automatically pseudo-stopped at the pseudo-stop position according to the determined pseudo-internal winning combination, so even if the player did not perform the pseudo-stop operation, Thus, it is possible to surely enjoy the reel effect by the pseudo game.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S133 that there is no reel that can be pseudo-stopped (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not a bet button has been operated (S136). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B has been operated. When determining that the bet button has been operated (YES), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S138.

  On the other hand, when determining that the bet button has not been operated (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S137). When determining that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S136.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S137 that the staging timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the start lever has been operated (pseudo start operation) (S138). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated. If it is determined that the start lever has not been operated (NO), the process of step S138 is repeatedly executed. Thus, even if one pseudo game is automatically advanced, the start of the next pseudo game is executed based on the pseudo start operation of the player, The reel effect can be surely enjoyed, and the benefit of the additional decision based on the pseudo internal winning combination can be surely enjoyed.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S138 that the start lever has been operated (YES), subsequently, it determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S139). If it is determined that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the pseudo game process ends. If it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the effect timer is updated to 0 (S140), and the pseudo game process ends.

  Even if it is determined in step S138 that the start lever has not been operated (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect timer is 0, and determines that the effect timer is 0. If it is determined, the pseudo game process may be terminated. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the pseudo game from hindering the smooth progress of the normal game.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S130 that a stop operation has been performed on a reel that can be pseudo-stopped (YES), if it determines in step S136 that a bet button operation has been performed (YES), it proceeds to step S138. , When it is determined that the start lever is operated (YES), in one or more cases, or in all cases, a predetermined value is added to the effecting timer, or the initial value is reset in the effecting timer. You may do it. With this configuration, the player performing each of the above-described operations in the pseudo game can ensure that the staging timer does not become 0, and reliably enjoy the reel effect by the pseudo game, It is possible to prevent the reel effect by the pseudo game from being unnecessarily redundant.

<Status management processing>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a state management process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “at-AT state” (S150). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the “AT state” (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an AT state management process (S151) described later in the description of FIG. 52, and proceeds to the process of step S160. .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the “at-AT state” (NO), subsequently, it is determined whether or not the effect game state is the main CZ state, that is, the effect game state is “main CZ state 1”. Or, it is determined whether or not it is “main CZ state 2” (S152). When determining that the effect game state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (YES), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S155.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S152 that the effect game state is not “Main CZ state 1” or “Main CZ state 2” (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently wins a strong chance lip at the first left stop. In other words, whether or not “strong chance lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “11”) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the first reel 3L is operated to stop the “special lip” It is determined whether or not one of "A1-6" or "special lip B" has been won (S153). If it is determined that the player has won the strong chance lip at the first left stop (YES), “main CZ state 1” is set as the effect game state (S154), and the process proceeds to step S160. Also, when it is determined that the strong chance lip has not been won in the first left stop (NO), the process proceeds to step S160.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the “main CZ state 1” or the “main CZ state 2” in step S152 (YES), whether the reel action 3 or 4 has been subsequently executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S155). If it is determined that the reel action 3 or 4 has been executed (YES), the “main CZ state 2” is set as the effect game state (S156), and the state management processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action 3 or 4 has not been executed (NO), subsequently, it determines whether any of the reel actions 5 to 8 has been executed (S157). When determining that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 has been executed (YES), the main CPU 51 clears the set effect game state, “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2”. (S159), the state management process ends.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S157 that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 has not been executed (NO), then the main CPU 51 determines whether the CZ game number counter is 8 (S158). ). When determining that the CZ game number counter is 8 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the processing of S159 described above, and ends the state management processing. Also, when the main CPU 51 determines that the CZ game number counter is not 8 (NO), it ends the state management process.

<AT state management processing>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the in-AT state management processing executed in step S151 of the state management processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change state 2” (S230). When determining that the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change state 2” (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the pseudo game has been executed (S231). Specifically, in step S206 of the lottery process during the pseudo probability changing state shown in FIG. 47, one or more times are determined as the number of pseudo games, and in step S120 of the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the process has been executed. If the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game is not being executed (NO), the process proceeds to step S236.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S231 that the pseudo game has been executed (YES), the main CPU 51 decrements the high security failure game number counter by one (S232). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the high security failure game number counter is 0 (S233). If the main CPU 51 determines that the number of high security failure games counter is 0 (YES), it sets “pseudo-probable change state 1” as the effect game state (S234), and proceeds to the process of step S236. That is, the main CPU 51 ends the effect game state “pseudo-probable change state 2” based on the fact that the number of high security failure games counter has become 0. Also, when the main CPU 51 determines that the high security failure game number counter is not 0 (YES), the process proceeds to step S236.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S230 that the effect game state is not the “pseudo probability change state 2” (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change state 1”. A determination is made (S235). When determining that the effect game state is not the “pseudo probability change state 1” (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S238.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S235 that the effect game state is the “pseudo-probable change state 1” (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not a bell lip has been won (S236). If it is determined that the prize has not been won (NO), the process proceeds to step S238. When it is determined that a prize has been won (YES), the pseudo probability change state is cleared (S237). That is, the winning of Belllip is the end condition of the effect game state “pseudo probability change state 1” and “pseudo probability change state 2”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not any of the bells has won (S238). Specifically, any one of “middle left / right bell”, “middle right / left bell”, “right / left middle bell”, and “right / middle left bell” which is “push order small role” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination (see FIG. 14) relating to one of the small winning combinations for which seven medals are paid out has been won. When determining that one of the bells has been won (YES), the main CPU 51 increments the AT game winning number counter by 1 (S239), and ends the AT state management process. Also, if the main CPU 51 determines that any of the bells has not been won (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the in-AT state management process.

  In step S238, the main CPU 51 may determine whether or not one of the bells has been won, instead of determining whether or not one of the bells has been won. Specifically, any one of “middle left / right bell”, “middle right / left bell”, “right / left middle bell”, and “right / middle left bell” which is “push order small role” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is also possible to determine whether or not any of the bells has been won, and if it is determined that one of the bells has been won, the process of step S239 may be executed. That is, the AT game winning number counter may be a counter that is updated by winning the “push order small combination”. With such a configuration, for example, in the AT game, between the player who performed the stop operation ignoring the notified stop operation order and the player who performed the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop operation order, Since there is a difference in the profits that can be obtained, it is possible to increase the tension of the game in the AT game and improve the interest of the game.

<External signal output management processing>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the external signal output management processing executed in step S160 of the state management processing shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the external signal 1 functions as a signal for displaying the continuation number of the AT game, that is, how much the AT game is continued on an external display or the like. It functions as a signal for displaying on an external display or the like, the number of initial hits of the AT game, that is, the transition from the normal game to the AT game.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether only the external signal 2 is on, that is, whether only the external signal 2 is output (S250). If it is determined that only the external signal 2 is ON (YES), the external signal 1 is set to ON, that is, the output of the external signal 1 is started (S251), and the AT game winning number counter, the AT end check counter Is set to an initial value (for example, 0) (S252), and the external signal output management process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that only the external signal 2 is not turned on (NO), subsequently, both the external signals 1 and 2 are turned on, that is, whether the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are both output. Is determined (S253).

  When the main CPU 51 determines that both the external signals 1 and 2 are on (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the AT game winning number counter is a predetermined value (S254). Here, for example, “38” is defined as the predetermined value. When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT game winning number counter has the predetermined value (YES), the external signal 1 is turned off, that is, the output of the external signal 1 is ended (S255), and the external signal output management process is performed. To end.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S254 that the AT game winning number counter is not the predetermined value (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the middle / right first stop has been performed at the time of the push order bell winning (step S254). S256). Specifically, any one of “middle left / right bell”, “middle right / left bell”, “right / left middle bell”, and “right / middle left bell” which is “push order small role” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, it is determined whether the first reel 3C or the right reel 3R has been subjected to the first stop operation.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S256 that the middle / right first stop has occurred at the time of the pressing order bell winning (YES), subsequently, it determines whether the AT end check counter is 1 or more (S257). ). When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is not 1 or more (that is, is 0) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management processing. When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 0) to the AT end check counter (S258), and executes the external signal output management process. finish.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S256 that the middle / right first stop has not been performed during the pressing order bell win (NO), then the main CPU 51 determines whether the left first stop has been performed during the push order bell win. (S259). Specifically, any one of “middle left / right bell”, “middle right / left bell”, “right / left middle bell”, and “right / middle left bell” which is “push order small role” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, it is determined whether or not the left reel 3L has been subjected to the first stop operation. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is not performed at the time of the pressing order bell winning (NO), the external signal output management process ends.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S259 that the first left stop has occurred at the time of the pressing order bell winning (YES), the AT end check counter is incremented by 1 (S260). It is determined whether or not there is (S261). When determining that the AT end check counter is not 2 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management processing.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is 2 in step S261 (YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the external signals 1 and 2, that is, ends the output of the external signals 1 and 2 (S262). ), The set effect game state, "AT state" is cleared (S263), and the external signal output management processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S253 that both the external signals 1 and 2 are not on (NO), then the main CPU 51 determines whether or not one of the bells has won in the middle / right first stop. A determination is made (S264). Specifically, any one of “middle left / right bell”, “middle right / left bell”, “right / left middle bell”, and “right / middle left bell” which is “push order small role” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is first stopped, and a symbol combination (see FIG. 14) related to any of the small wins in which seven medals are paid out is won. Judge. When the main CPU 51 determines that one of the bells has won in the middle / right first stop (YES), it increments the regular game winning number counter by 1 (S265).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the regular game winning number counter is 3 (S266). When the main CPU 51 determines that the normal game winning number counter is not 3 (NO), the external signal output management process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the regular game winning number counter is 3 (YES), the external signal 2 is turned on, that is, the output of the external signal 2 is started (S267), and the effect game state is set. The “in-AT state” is set (S268), and the external signal output management processing ends.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S264 that one of the bells has not been won at the middle / right first stop (NO), then the main CPU 51 determines whether the left first stop has been performed at the time of the pressing order bell win. Is determined (S269). Specifically, any one of “middle left / right bell”, “middle right / left bell”, “right / left middle bell”, and “right / middle left bell” which is “push order small role” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, it is determined whether or not the left reel 3L has been subjected to the first stop operation. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is not performed at the time of the pressing order bell winning (NO), the external signal output management process ends. If the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop has occurred at the time of the pressing order bell winning (YES), the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 0) to the regular game winning number counter (S270), and outputs an external signal. The management processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the start condition for shifting to the AT game is satisfied, and after shifting from the normal game to the AT game, the value of the normal game winning number counter becomes 3 (that is, “press”). Based on the fact that the pressing order was correct three consecutive times at the time of winning the "Small Order", the effect game state is shifted to the "AT state" and the output of the external signal 2 is started, and in the next game, the external signal is output. The output of the external signal 1 is started based on the output of only the second signal, and when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the AT game winning number counter becomes 38. (I.e., in the "AT state", the number of winnings of the "push order small combination" has reached 38), and only the output of the external signal 1 is terminated. Here, when the AT game is continued, the output of the external signal 1 is started again in the next game. In addition, when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the AT end check counter becomes 2 (that is, the pressing order is incorrect twice consecutively when the “low pressing order” is won). Thus, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 is terminated.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the state of the AT game, which is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is output from the external centralized terminal board of the pachislot machine 1 by outputting at least two types of external signals, thereby providing an external display or the like. , The number of initial hits of the AT game and the number of continuations of the AT game that are of interest to the player can be appropriately displayed on an external display or the like. In addition, since the output timing of the external signal 1 and the output timing of the external signal 2 can be made different with a simple configuration, the control load on the external display can be reduced, and the occurrence of communication errors and the like can be reduced. Can also be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the condition for starting the output of the external signal 2 is that the value of the number-of-winning-number-of-games counter during normal game is set to 3 (that is, the correct answer of the pushing order for three consecutive times when the “push order small combination” is won) It is configured so that the establishment thereof comes later than the start condition for shifting to the AT game (the start of the AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the condition for terminating the output of the external signal 1 is that the value of the number-of-winning-times counter during the AT game becomes 38 (that is, in the “AT state”, the “push order small hand” It is assumed that the winning number is 38), and the establishment of the AT game is later than the end condition (the end of the AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81). Specifically, as described later in the description of FIG. 73, when “150” is set as the initial value of the difference number counter for AT management, the addition of the winning number counter during the AT game is started. Since it is after winning the "push order small win" three times, the value of the AT management difference number counter at that time is "150-4 sheets x 3 times = 138". Thereafter, in the "AT state", when the winning number of the "push order small hand" reaches 35, the value of the AT management difference number counter becomes "138-4 sheets x 35 times = -2". The condition for terminating the output of the external signal 1 comes later than the condition for terminating the AT game.

  When the AT game ends, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 ends when the value of the AT end check counter becomes 2, and when the AT game continues, the value of the AT end check counter The value of the number-of-winning-games AT counter becomes 38 before the value becomes 2, and after the output of the external signal 1 is terminated once, the output of the external signal 1 is started again to indicate the number of times the AT is continued. The information can be displayed on the external display. Note that the initial value “150” of the AT management difference number counter can be replaced with the AT count “38”, so if the AT count “38” is regarded as one set, the output of the external signal 1 is obtained. Thus, it can be said that information indicating how many sets of AT games have been played can be displayed on the external display.

  With such a configuration, the start and end of the AT game can be notified to the player earlier by, for example, notification by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like than display by the external display or the like. The convenience of the player who is playing can be improved. In addition, since the subtraction value of the difference number counter for AT management due to the winning of the “push order small role” and the winning number show almost the same value, in particular, the number of AT game continuations (one set) is It can be appropriately displayed with a simple configuration.

<Lock execution process at the end of the game>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a game end lock execution process executed in step S26 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (S170). When determining that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game end lock execution process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the stop operation has been performed in the additional lock push order (S171). Here, the additional lock push order is the stop operation order stored in S101 of the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 46, and specifically, the first left stop (that is, the stop operation order “left center right”). , Or "right and left middle"), and is determined by lottery among the four stop operation orders (that is, the stop operation order "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right left middle" or "right middle left"). This is one stop operation sequence. If the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation has not been performed in the additional lock push order (NO), the game end lock execution processing ends.

  If the main CPU determines in step S171 that the stop operation has been performed in the push-on order for additional lock (YES), the lock data is set after all the stops (S173), and “3581” (about 4 seconds) is set in the production timer. ) Is set (S174), the lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 is generated, and the generated lock command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S175). ), The game end lock execution process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop and a prize is won, the effect game state Is "normal game state", the effect game state shifts to "main CZ state 1", but if the effect game state is "AT state", no profit is given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the AT game is started under the control of the sub CPU 81, the effect game state shifts to the "AT state" under the control of the main CPU 51. When the effect game state is not the "AT state" (this state may be referred to as "AT preparation state"), the effect game state is changed to the "main CZ state 1". It is not appropriate to move to.

  On the other hand, although the winning probability of the strong chance lip does not change depending on each effect game state or whether the game is a normal game or an AT game (see FIG. 15), the profit is completely changed depending on the winning time of the strong chance lip. It is also not appropriate that is not given.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, the additional lock pressing order is determined by lottery, and the stop operation is performed according to the determined additional lock pressing order. In this case, an advantage different from the advantage of shifting the effect game state to the “main CZ state 1” is provided.

  Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, during the normal game, under the control of the sub CPU 81, whether the notification of the stop operation order for causing the player to make the first left stop is executed, Alternatively, in the case where the penalty is given as described above, by not informing the stop operation order, the player is caused to perform the stop operation by the first left stop, and the effect game state is changed to the “main CZ state 1”. ”.

  On the other hand, in the AT game or in the AT preparation state, a lottery is first performed under the control of the sub CPU 81 to determine whether or not to notify the additional lock pressing order, and when the lottery result is a winning, The stop operation sequence related to the determined additional lock pressing order is notified, and when the stop operation is performed according to this notification, the game end lock based on the lock data after all stops is executed, and the game ends. Based on the execution of the lock, addition (addition) lottery of the AT number is executed to provide a benefit of adding (addition) the AT number.

  With this configuration, during the AT game or during the AT preparation state, the state is not shifted to the chance zone state (main CZ state) where reel actions (for example, reel actions 1 to 8) can occur, A specific internal winning combination (for example, a strong chance lip) is determined even if the game content is prevented from being obscured and the game is not shifted to the chance zone state (main CZ state). Can be given to the player as different benefits.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not the above-mentioned different profits are given can be controlled by the sub CPU 81, and therefore, with a simple configuration, the profit of the player and the profit of the game hall can be compared. Equity can be managed appropriately.

<Interrupt Process Controlled by Main CPU> FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 51. This processing is executed every 1.1172 ms.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S320). Next, the main CPU 51 executes an input port check process described later in the description of FIG. 56 (S321). In this input port check processing, for example, the presence or absence of signals from various switches and sensors connected to the main CPU 51 is confirmed.

  For example, the main CPU 51 stores, in the main RAM 53, on-edge / off-edge information of various switches such as the start switch 16S and the stop switch 17S and on / off information of various sensors such as the medal sensor 35S.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a timer update process (S322). Next, the main CPU 51 executes a communication data transmission process described later in the description of FIG. 57 (S323). Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel control process described later in the description of FIG. 57 (S324).

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a lamp / 7SEG driving process (S325). For example, the main CPU 51 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units. Next, the main CPU 51 restores the register (S326), and ends the interrupt processing that occurs periodically.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 51 stores the state of the input port before the previous interrupt, that is, one interrupt before, in the main RAM 53 (S331), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 53 (S332).

  In this way, by comparing the state of the input port one interrupt before and the current state of the input port, the main CPU 51 can check the state of both input ports, and It is checked whether or not the state has changed, for example, whether or not the MAX bet button 15A, the 1BET button 15B, the start lever 16 and the like have been operated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 53 (S333). For example, when the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 16S is data indicating OFF before one interrupt but is data indicating ON at present, the main CPU 51 shifts to the ON edge. Is stored in the main RAM 53, and the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 16S was data indicating ON before one interrupt, but is now data indicating OFF. If there is, off-edge information indicating the transition to the off-edge is stored in the main RAM 53.

<Communication data transmission processing>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing communication data transmission processing executed in step S323 of the interruption processing under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 decrements the communication data transmission timer by one (S340). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the communication data transmission timer is 0 (S341).

  Here, when determining that the communication data transmission timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the communication data transmission processing. On the other hand, when determining that the communication data transmission timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (S342).

  Here, when it is determined that there is no untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (NO), the main CPU 51 generates no-operation command data and transmits the generated no-operation command data to the communication data allocated to the main RAM 53. It is stored in the storage area (S343).

  In the no-operation command data, on-edge / off-edge information of various switches and on / off information of various sensors stored in the above-described input port check processing are set as parameters. This prevents an interrupt process in which a command is not transmitted, thereby preventing a fraudulent act on command transmission. In addition, by causing the sub CPU 81 to recognize such information, a period during which an operation is originally invalid is disabled. The effect can be changed based on an operation (for example, an operation on the MAX bet button 15A during the rotation of the reel).

  In step S342, when it is determined that there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (YES), or after executing the processing of step S343, the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 14) to the communication data transmission timer. (S344).

  Next, the main CPU 51 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 42 (S345). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the transmission of the communication data has been completed (S346).

  Here, when it is determined that the transmission of the communication data has not been completed (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S345. On the other hand, when determining that the transmission of the communication data has been completed (YES), the main CPU 51 updates the communication data storage area to be cleared (S347), and ends the communication data transmission processing.

<Reel control processing>
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed in step S324 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a reel action has been determined (S271). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the above-described reel actions 1 to 14 (including the pseudo internal winning combination in the reel actions 11 to 14) or the special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined. When determining that the reel action has been determined (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a reel effect control process (S272) described later in the description of FIG. 59, and ends the reel control process. Although not shown, the main CPU 51 also determines the execution time of the reel action and determines whether or not to perform the process of step S272. For example, since the reel actions 7 and 8 execute the reel action in the next game of the determined game, when the reel actions 7 and 8 are determined, the main CPU 51 executes the game of the next game. The start time (when executing the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49) is determined to be the execution time, and the process of step S272 is performed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 executes the normal reel control processing (S273) and ends the reel control processing.

  Here, in the normal reel control processing, the main CPU 51 controls the drive of each stepping motor based on the rotation start request of each reel in the reel rotation start processing (S20 in FIG. 42), thereby controlling the rotation of each reel. An acceleration process for accelerating is performed, and based on the fact that each reel has reached a predetermined speed (for example, 80 revolutions / minute), the drive speed of each stepping motor is controlled to maintain the predetermined speed. The process is executed, and a stop process for stopping the rotation of each reel is executed by controlling the drive of each stepping motor based on the rotation stop request of each reel in the stop control process (S22 in FIG. 42).

<Reel effect control processing>
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a reel effect control process executed in step S272 of the reel control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets reel effect selection data according to the type of reel action (S274). Here, the reel effect selection data is data configured as shown in an example in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes an effect target reel selection process (S275). Specifically, the main CPU 51 selects the most appropriate effect target reel for performing the reel effect according to the set reel effect selection data. For example, when the reel effect selection data corresponds to a reel effect in which each reel is sequentially rotated in the order of the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, in this effect target reel selection process, An effect target reel is selected in the order of 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. In addition, the selection mode of the production target reel is not limited to this. For example, among the reels being pseudo-rotated, the reels may be set in a predetermined order (for example, the order of setting the left-side reel) or may be set randomly. Further, the data for reel effect selection may include data in which the order of setting the effect target reels can be identified.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the reel effect selection data, the number of effects corresponding to the effect target reel corresponding to the effect target reel, and the excitation output selection data (S276). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, when the reel effect selection data is “1” and the effect target reel is the middle reel 3C, when the process of step S276 is first executed, 1 is set as the effect number. The excitation output table for reverse acceleration rotation is set as the excitation output selection data. In the process of step S276, when the effect target reel is changed in the effect target reel change control process of step S288 described later, the effect number and the excitation output selection data of the portion to be restarted are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data (S277). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 or It is determined whether it is 2. When determining that the excitation output selection data is not the symbol position adjustment data (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S279. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a reel effect adjustment output process (S278) described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets an effect excitation output table based on the excitation output selection data or the result of the reel effect adjustment output process (S279). The result of the reel effect adjustment output process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the effect excitation output table that has been set, and sets the excitation direction data and the head data of the effect excitation timer (S280). Here, the effect excitation output table is a table configured as shown as an example in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 outputs the excitation data based on the excitation direction data, and subtracts one from the effect excitation timer (S281). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect excitation timer is 0 (S282). When determining that the effect excitation timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S281.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect excitation timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the effect excitation output table that has been set, and updates the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer (S283). ). Specifically, when the excitation direction data and the start data of the effect excitation timer are set, and when it is determined that the effect excitation timer is 0, the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer are reset from the start. Update to the second data (ie, the next data). If the next data in the effect excitation output table is an end code, the data is updated to the end code.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the effect excitation output table is an end code (S284). When determining that the data in the effect excitation output table is not the end code (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S281. On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the effect excitation output table is an end code (YES), then the main CPU 51 determines whether the effect output control based on the excitation output selection data has been executed for the number of effects. Is determined (S285). If the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has not been performed for the number of effects (NO), the process returns to step S280.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S285 that the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has been executed for the number of effects (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the reel effect selection data that has been set, and determines the number of effects. The selection data for excitation output is updated (S286). Specifically, the number of effects and the excitation output selection data are updated to the next data. If the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data (S287). When the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the reel effect selection data is not the effect phase end data (NO), the main CPU 51 executes an effect target reel change control process (S288), and returns to the process of step S276. In this effect target reel change control process, in performing the reel effect, the main CPU 51 performs the effect control of one effect target reel (for example, the left reel 3L) and the other effect target reels (for example, the middle reel 3C, Or, it is determined whether or not the production control of the right reel 3R) should be started or resumed. , A process for changing from the left reel 3L) to another effect target reel (for example, the middle reel 3C). With such a configuration, for example, in the reel effect selection data, even if the number of effects and excitation output selection data specified for a specific effect target reel are large, other effect target reels are linked. , It is possible to smoothly execute the intended reel effect. It should be noted that whether or not the effect target reel should be changed may be determined according to the specified number of effects or / and the number of excitation output selection data, or a dedicated change control timer may be set, The determination may be made based on the fact that the change control timer has become 0 and the process of step S286 has been completed. Furthermore, the reel effect selection data may include data indicating that the effect target reel should be changed and data that can identify the effect target reel to be changed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect has been completed on all reels (S289). ). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data for all effect target reels. If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect has not been completed on all reels (NO), the process returns to step S275. When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect has been completed on all reels (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect control process.

<Reel effect adjustment output processing>
FIGS. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the reel effect adjustment output process executed in step S278 of the reel effect control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 (S290). When determining that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an effect symbol position update process (S291), which will be described later with reference to FIG. It is determined whether the position is 0 (S292). When determining that the effect symbol position is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S294.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S292 that the effect symbol position is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set reel effect selection data, and updates the number of effects and the excitation output selection data (step S292). S293). Specifically, the number of effects and the excitation output selection data are updated to the next data. If the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets a reverse rotation excitation output table as the presentation excitation output table (S294), and ends the reel presentation adjustment output processing. Here, the reverse rotation excitation output table is a table configured as shown as an example in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S290 that the symbol position adjustment data is not the symbol position adjustment data 1 (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 3. A determination is made (S295). When determining that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 3 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an effect symbol position update process (S296), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, and executes the effect excitation output table. Then, the constant-speed rotation excitation output table 1 is set (S297), and the reel effect adjustment output processing ends. Here, the constant speed rotation excitation output table 1 is a table configured as shown in an example in FIG.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S295 that the symbol position adjustment data is not the symbol position adjustment data 3 (YES), that is, the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 2 and the main CPU 51 determines in FIG. An effect symbol position update process (S298) described later is executed, and subsequently, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol position is data of less than one rotation (S299). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol position updated in the effect symbol position update process in step S298 is a symbol position that can be identified without detecting the reel index. That is, the reel index is detected when the reel position detection circuit 63 sets each reel to a reference position (a position where the symbol position data is 0). It is determined whether or not the symbol position passes through the position.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is not data of less than one rotation (NO), the acceleration output table for acceleration rotation is set as the excitation output table for effect (S300), and the reel effect adjustment output process is performed. finish. Here, the acceleration output table for acceleration rotation is a table configured as shown as an example in FIG.

  On the other hand, when determining that the effect symbol position is data of less than one rotation (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not it is the effect symbol position search phase (S301). Although not shown in the example of the reel effect selection data shown in FIG. 38, a plurality of symbol position adjustment data are defined as excitation output selection data in one reel effect selection data. In any case, data indicating whether to perform collation with effect symbol position search data to be described later is further defined, and based on the data, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol position search phase is to be performed. Will be done.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that it is not the effect symbol position search phase (NO), it sets the constant speed rotation excitation output table 2 as the effect excitation output table (S308), and ends the reel effect adjustment output processing. . Here, the constant-speed rotation excitation output table 2 is a table configured as shown in an example in FIG.

  If the main CPU 51 determines that it is the effect symbol position search phase (YES), it sets effect symbol position search data and the number of searches corresponding to the type of reel action and the effect target reel (S302). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 40, when the reel action 9 is determined and the effect target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), 2 (symbol position data is 2) as effect symbol position search data. Is set, and 1 is set as the number of searches.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect symbol position matches the effect symbol position search data (S303). When determining that the effect symbol position matches the effect symbol position search data (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set reel effect selection data, and updates the number of effects and the excitation output selection data ( S304). Specifically, the number of effects and the excitation output selection data are updated to the next data. If the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data. Next, the main CPU 51 executes the processing of S308 described above, and ends the reel effect adjustment output processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect symbol position and the effect symbol position search data do not match (NO), the main CPU 51 decrements the number of searches by one (S305), and then determines whether the number of searches is zero. Is determined (S306). When determining that the number of searches is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the effect symbol position search data (S307), and returns to the process of step S303.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S306 that the number of searches is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the processing of S308 described above, and ends the reel effect adjustment output processing.

<Direction symbol position update processing>
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol position update process executed in steps S291, S296, and S298 of the reel effect adjustment output process shown in FIGS. 60 and 61.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets a stop position at the end of the previous game or at the end of the previous reel effect as an effect symbol position (S310). That is, when the symbol position adjustment data is at the beginning of the reel effect selection data, the stop position at the end of the previous game is set as the effect symbol position, and the symbol position adjustment data is in the middle or last of the reel effect selection data. , The stop position at the end of the previous reel effect (ie, at the end of the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data before the symbol position adjustment data) is set as the effect symbol position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the input state of the previous reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) and the input state of the current reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) (S311). Specifically, information on the on-edge or off-edge of the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) stored in the input port check process shown in FIG. 56 is obtained.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is at an off edge (S312). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the input data of the input port allocated to the reel position detection circuit 63 was data indicating ON in the previous time but data indicating OFF in this time.

  When determining that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is off-edge (YES), the main CPU 51 clears the effect symbol position (S313) and ends the effect symbol position update process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is not off-edge (NO), the effect symbol position is incremented by 1 (S314), and the effect symbol position update processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel effect (the effect in the symbol variation mode) is executed based on the reel effect selection data, and the symbol position adjustment data is defined in the reel effect selection data. Is configured to update the effect symbol position, select an effect excitation output table in accordance with the updated effect symbol position and the type of the symbol position adjustment data, and perform excitation output control. For example, even when the excitation output control by the same forward rotation is performed, if a small amount of rotation is sufficient according to the updated effect symbol position and the type of the symbol position adjustment data, the excitation output for constant-speed rotation is required. When the table 1 or 2 is set and a large amount of rotation is required, the excitation output table for acceleration rotation is set. That is, it is not necessary to always search for the symbol position and execute the reel effect, and it is not necessary to define all the reel effect selection data. A reel effect can be performed. Therefore, even if the symbol positions of the reels are shifted before the start of the reel effect or during the reel effect, the shift is adjusted without increasing the control load, and the intended reel effect is performed by the player. Can be enjoyed.

[Sub-control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the power-on processing of the sub CPU 81 when the power is turned on.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process (S350). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs an error check on the sub RAM 83 and the like and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task and a sound control task which are task groups synchronized with the timer interrupt.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 64 (S351). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 81 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 81 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to the timer interrupt event message, This is a process for executing a process for controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S352). In the sound control task, the state of sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R is controlled by the sub CPU 81. Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the mother task (S353), and ends the power-on process. In the mother task, a main board communication task shown in FIG. 66 and a display control task (not shown) for controlling display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are started.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task started in step S351 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S360). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a process of initializing the lamp-related data (S361).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a timer interrupt wait (S362). In this process, until the sub CPU 81 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 81 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization.

  As a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization, for example, there is a main board communication task which is a task group of the command reception interrupt synchronization. In addition, a task group (not shown) for power supply interruption synchronization, a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like are given.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S363). In this process, the task having the next priority to the timer interrupt task group, which is the same group as the lamp control task, is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the priority of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization is basically the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task having the next priority to the lamp control task is executed. In step S363, the processes in steps S372 and S373 of the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 are executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a lamp data analysis process (S364), executes a lamp effect execution process (S365), and returns to the process of step S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task started in step S352 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes processing for initializing sound-related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 20L and 20R (S370). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the task having the next priority to the task group of the timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a sound data analysis process (S372), performs a sound effect execution process (S373), and executes the process of step S371.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task started in the mother task started in step S353 shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 81 executes the initialization of the communication message queue (S380), and checks the received command (S381).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a command different from the previous command has been received (S382). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 returns to the process of step S381.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the received command is a regular command, creates game information from the received command, and creates the game information. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 83 (S383). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 67 (S384), and returns to the processing of step S381.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing executed in step S384 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 68 (S390), executes the lamp data determination processing (S391), executes the sound data determination processing (S392), and registers the determined data. (S393), and terminates the command analysis processing.

<Direction content decision processing>
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination processing executed in step S390 of the command analysis processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether an initialization command has been received (S400). Here, if it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization command reception process (S401), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the initialization command, effect data based on the information transmitted as the initialization command is set. For example, the effect state is restored or the effect state is initialized based on the presence or absence of the setting change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S402). If it is determined that the medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a medal insertion command receiving process (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command receiving process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a medal insertion sound is set based on whether or not a medal has been inserted.

  On the other hand, when determining that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a start command has been received (S404). Here, when it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a start command receiving process described later in the description of FIG. 69 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as a start command is set. For example, during an AT game, if the internal winning combination is a pushing sequence, effect data for notifying a stop operation procedure that is most advantageous for the player is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received (S406). Here, when it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the processing at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command (S407), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the processing at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a reel rotation start sound is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a reel stop command has been received (S408). Here, when it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a process at the time of receiving the reel stop command (S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a reel stop sound is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a lock command has been received (S410). Here, if it is determined that the lock command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a lock command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 74 (S411), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the lock command, effect data based on the information transmitted as the lock command is set. For example, effect data for displaying a video according to the type of reel action is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S412). Here, when it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a winning operation command receiving process described later in the description of FIG. 75 (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. . In the processing at the time of winning operation command reception, effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set. For example, effect data for outputting payout sound according to the number of payouts according to the winning combination is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a bonus start command has been received (S414). Here, when it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a process at the time of receiving the bonus start command (S415), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus start command, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. In the present embodiment, since the AT game is configured to be relatively more advantageous than the BB game state, unique effect data is generated based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command. May not be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a bonus end command has been received (S416). Here, when it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a process at the time of receiving the bonus end command (S417), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set. In the present embodiment, since the AT game is configured to be more advantageous than the BB game state, unique effect data is generated based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command. May not be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a no-operation command has been received (S418). Here, when it is determined that the no-operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a no-operation command reception process (S419), and ends the effect content determination process.

  In the no-operation command receiving process, the effect data may be varied based on information transmitted as the no-operation command. For example, when the effect data determined in the processing at the time of receiving the start command is effect data requesting continuous hitting of the MAX bet button 15A, the MAX bet button 15A received as a no-operation command is in the on-edge state or off-edge state. The effect data is varied based on the information on the state. On the other hand, if it is determined in S418 that the no-operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination processing.

<Start command reception processing>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the start command receiving process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not an AT game is being performed (S430). When determining that the AT game is not being performed (NO), the sub CPU 81 executes a normal game processing (S443), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, and ends the start command receiving process. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that an AT game is being performed (YES), subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect game state is an “AT state” (S431). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the above-described AT preparation is being performed.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect game state is not the “AT state” (is the AT preparation state) (NO), it sets the AT state transition navigation data according to the internal winning combination (S432). ), And proceeds to the process of step S438. Here, the navigation data for shifting to the during AT state is data for notifying the stop operation order in which seven medals will be paid out when the “push order small combination” is determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, when the strong chance lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the data is for notifying the stop operation order so that the stop operation is not performed in the first left stop. Although illustration is omitted, as described above, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify the additional lock push order. If this lottery result is a winning, the determined additional lock push order is determined. It can also be data for notifying such a stop operation sequence.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect game state is the “AT state” (not the AT preparation state) (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the state is the additional state (S433). . If the sub CPU 81 determines that the vehicle is in the additional state (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes an additional state process (S434) described later in the description of FIG. 70, and proceeds to the process of step S437.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S433 that it is not in the additional state (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect game state is the pseudo probable state (“pseudo probable state 1” or “pseudo probable state 2”). A determination is made (S435). If it is determined that the effect game state is not the pseudo-probable state (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S437. If it is determined that the effect game state is the pseudo-probable state (YES), FIG. The processing during the pseudo probable change state (S436), which will be described later in the description, is executed.

  Next, if the navigation data has not been set, the sub CPU 81 sets the AT gaming navigation data according to the internal winning combination (S437). Here, the navigation data during the AT game is basically the same as the navigation data for shifting to the state during the AT, but BAR lip 1, BAR lip 2, or fake BAR lip is determined as the internal winning combination. In some cases, the data may be data for notifying the stop operation sequence of the reverse push (that is, the stop operation sequence in which the stop operation is performed in the first right stop).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is one of Bell Lips 1 to 4 (S438). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not any of Bell Lips 1 to 4 (NO), the processing at the time of receiving the start command ends. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is any of Bell Lips 1 to 4 (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the AT point addition lottery table shown in FIG. Then, a point addition lottery is executed (S439).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the result of the above-described AT point addition lottery is addition (winning) (S440). When determining that the result of the point addition lottery during AT is not addition (winning) (maintenance (non-winning)) (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the result of the AT point addition lottery is addition (winning) (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the AT point counter (S441), and responds to the AT point counter value. The effect data is set (S442), and the processing at the time of receiving the start command is ended.

  Here, the effect data according to the AT point counter value is effect data for causing the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 to emit light according to the current value of the AT point counter. For example, when the above-described movable component 309 shifts from the normal game to the AT game, the movable component 309 is controlled to move from the initial position to the rendering position, and accordingly, the arch cover 324 and the light-emitting display unit 325 are visually recognized. You. Then, when the point counter value during AT becomes 1, the effect data for causing the light emitting display unit 325 to light up and display one step is set, and when the point counter value during AT becomes 2, the light emitting display unit 325 is lighted up and displayed in two steps. When the effect counter data is set and the point counter value during AT becomes 3, the effect data for causing the light-emitting display unit 325 to be lit and displayed in three stages is set, and when the point counter value during AT becomes 4, the arch cover 324 is set. The effect data for lighting display is set. Thereby, the player can recognize the acquired AT point during the AT game.

  Further, the AT points acquired during the AT game are cumulatively added, and as described later in the description of FIG. 75, when the acquired AT points become 4 points, the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less. In this case, the AT game can be performed (continued) again (that is, the right to continue the AT game is given). The points during AT can be carried over to at least the next AT game.

  Note that the above-described movable component 309 is controlled to move from the presentation position to the initial position when the transition from the AT game to the normal game is performed, and accordingly, the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 are controlled so as to be invisible. You. For this reason, in the normal game, it is not possible to recognize the carried-in AT point.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the AT game, lottery of the points during the AT is performed, and the results are accumulated and stored. Since the AT game is configured to continue, the longer the AT game lasts, the higher the possibility that the AT game will continue, so that the expectation of the addition during the AT game does not become monotonous, The interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, even when the stored AT point is less than the predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), the player can carry over the AT point to at least the next AT game. Can prevent the game from being stopped immediately after the end of the AT game, which contributes to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine.

  In addition, in the normal game other than the AT game, since it is configured not to notify the carried-in AT point, the player who starts the game from the normal game plays the game with a sense of expectation. It is possible to make it.

<In-addition state processing>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the processing during the additional state executed in step S434 of the processing at the time of reception of the start command shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 decrements the additional state management counter by one (S450). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the additional state management counter is 10 or more (S451). When determining that the additional state management counter is 10 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes an additional state introduction time AT number addition lottery process (S452) and ends the additional state processing. Here, in the additional state introduction time AT number addition lottery process, for example, the AT number addition value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined AT number addition value is added to the AT management difference number counter. Although illustration is omitted, when the additional state introduction AT number addition lottery process is executed, a video or the like is displayed to convey that the state has shifted to the additional state or that the additional state has been continued. The production data is set.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the added state management counter is not 10 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the point added lottery table during the added state shown in FIG. Is determined (S453), and the determined point addition value is added to the point counter in the added state (S454).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the point counter in the added state is 100 or more (S455). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter in the added state is 100 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the additional number of times of AT in the added state lottery table shown in FIG. 36, and based on the added state management counter value. The AT number addition value is determined (S456), the determined AT number addition value is added to the difference number counter for AT management (S457), the point counter in the added state is decremented by 100 (S458), and the added state management counter is set. An initial value (for example, 12) is set (S459), and the process in the additional state ends.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter in the added state is not 100 or more (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not the added state management counter is 0 (S460). When determining that the added state management counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the point counter during the added state (S461), clears the state during the added state (S462), and ends the processing during the added state. I do. Also, when it is determined that the added state management counter is not 0 (NO), the processing in the added state is ended.

<Process during pseudo probability change state>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the pseudo probable change state process executed in step S436 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 69.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the fall waiting flag is ON (S470). Here, the fall waiting flag is a flag that is turned on in step S480 described later, and under the control of the main CPU 51, “pseudo probability change state 1” or “pseudo probability change state 1” is set as the effect game state. However, in the control of the sub CPU 81, this is a flag for identifying that the pseudo probable change state has already ended. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 shifts to the processing of step S473.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is ON (YES), subsequently, it determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (S471). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether any of the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. When determining that the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for falling in the pseudo probability changing state (S472), and ends the processing in the pseudo probability changing state. Here, the navigation data for falling in the pseudo probability changing state is a stop operation sequence in which Bell Lip wins when the internal winning combination is one of Normal Lips 1 to 4 or Bell Lips 1 to 4 (see FIG. 19). ).

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S471 that the internal winning combination does not include a bell lip (NO), the sub CPU 81 shifts to the processing in step S473. In other words, even when the fall waiting flag is on, if the internal winning combination does not include a bell lip, the sub CPU 81 executes the pseudo game or executes the processing in step S473 described later. The lottery of the AT number is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes an AT number addition lottery process (S473) during the pseudo probability change state. In the pseudo probability changing state, in the AT number addition lottery process, an AT number addition value is determined based on, for example, an internal winning combination, and the determined AT number addition value is determined regardless of whether the pseudo game is executed. It is added to the AT management difference number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo game is executed (S474). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo game is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 shifts to the processing of step S482.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo game is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change state 2” (S475). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change state 2” (YES), the sub CPU 81 shifts to the processing of step S482.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S475 that the effect game state is not the “pseudo probability change state 2” (NO), subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the fall waiting flag is on (S476). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing in the pseudo probability changing state.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S476 that the fall waiting flag is not on (NO), the pseudo probable change state management counter is decremented by 1 (S477). It is determined whether or not it is (S478). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo probability change state management counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 81 shifts to the processing of step S482.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo probability change state management counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo probability change state end lottery table shown in FIG. The transition state is determined (S479). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the end of the probable change, that is, whether or not the end of the probable change is determined as the transition state (S480). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the end of the probable change has not been determined as the transition state (the continuation of the probable change has been determined) (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S482.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S480 that the end of the probable change has been determined as the transition state (YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the fall waiting flag (S481).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (S482). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether any of the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. When determining that the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for maintaining the pseudo probable state (S483), and ends the processing during the pseudo probable state. Also, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination does not include the bell lip (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing in the pseudo probability changing state. Here, the navigation data for maintaining the pseudo probability change state notifies the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 19) in which the bell lip does not win when the internal winning combination is one of the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4. This is the data for

<Normal game processing>
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the normal in-game process executed in step S443 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 69.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a fixed combination (S490). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a cherry lip, a strong cherry lip, or a strong bell. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is the determined combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S493. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not the determined combination (NO), the normal game number counter is incremented by 1 (S491). Then, it is determined whether the normal game number counter = the number of ceiling games. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the normal game has reached the ceiling game number described above (the ceiling game number has been exhausted). If it is determined that the normal game number counter is equal to the number of ceiling games (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes an AT entry process (S493), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, and proceeds to the process of step S499.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S492 that the normal game number counter is not equal to the ceiling game number (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the normal game number counter is 1 (S494). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the first game after the end of the AT game. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the mode suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 32, and based on the current mode, a mode suggestion effect (for example, mode suggestion effect). The effect data corresponding to any of effects 1 to 9) is determined (S495), and the process proceeds to step S499.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter is not 1 (NO), subsequently, it determines whether the ones place of the normal game number counter is 0 (S496). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the ones digit of the normal game number counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 81 shifts to a process of step S499.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S496 that the ones digit of the normal game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 81 calculates the remaining game number by the ceiling game number-normal game number counter (S497). With reference to the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 33, the remaining game number suggestion effect (for example, effect data corresponding to any of the mode suggestion effects 1 to 10) is determined based on the remaining game number (S498). ). In the present embodiment, the remaining game number suggestion effect is thus executed for each of the 10 games in the normal game.

  Next, if the effect data has not been set, that is, if the effect data has not been determined, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data according to the internal winning combination and the like (S499), and ends the normal game processing.

<Process at AT rush>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the AT entry process executed in step S493 of the normal game process shown in FIG. 72 and the lock command reception process S525 shown in FIG. 74.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data at the time of AT entry (S510). Here, the effect data at the time of AT entry is effect data for notifying the transition from the normal game to the AT game, and also for performing control for moving the above-described movable component 309 from the initial position to the effect position. It is production data.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the AT game from the next game (S511), and adds 150 to the AT management difference number counter (S512).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a mode shift lottery, determines the next mode from the modes A to C (S513), and determines the next ceiling game number based on the determined mode (S514). ), The normal game number counter is cleared (S515), and the AT entry process ends.

  In the process of step S512, the sub CPU 81 replaces the process of adding 150 to the difference number counter for AT management (the above-described basic continuation number is given) and replaces the value of a plurality of difference numbers for AT management (for example, 100, 150, or 200), a process of determining the value of the AT management difference number counter to be added by lottery and adding the values may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the number of basic continuations to be provided, and diversify the number of continuations of the AT game.

<Process when receiving lock command>
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the lock command receiving process executed in step S411 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a special reel action is executed (S520). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not any of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is executed. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the special reel action is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds an AT count addition value corresponding to the type of the special reel action to the AT management difference number counter (S521), and receives the lock command. The time processing ends. Here, for example, when the special reel action 1 is executed, the AT count addition value is 0, and the AT count is not substantially added. However, when the special reel action 2 is executed, the AT count is set. When 300 is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter and the special reel action 3 is executed, 400 is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter as the AT number addition value, and the special reel is added. When the action 4 is executed, 500 is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter as the AT number addition value.

  In the processing of step S521, the sub CPU 81 replaces the processing of adding the value of the AT management difference number counter corresponding to the type of the special reel action (the above-described addition of the number of additional continuations) with a plurality of AT management From the value of the difference number counter (for example, 300, 400, 500, or 1000), the value of the AT management difference number counter to be added by lottery may be determined and added. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the number of additional continuations to be provided and diversify the number of continuations of the AT game.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the special reel action is not executed (NO), subsequently, it determines whether the reel action 9 or 10 is executed (S522). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel action 9 or 10 is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets an initial value (for example, 3) to the pseudo probability change state management counter (S523), and ends the lock command receiving process. I do.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S522 that the reel action 9 or 10 is not executed (NO), subsequently, it determines whether any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is executed (S524). . If the sub CPU 81 determines that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the AT entry process (S525) shown in FIG. 73 and ends the lock command reception process. .

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S524 that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is not executed (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (S526). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination is determined (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the AT number addition lottery based on the pseudo internal winning combination, and adds the lottery result to the AT management difference number counter. (S527), and the lock command receiving process ends.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S526 that the pseudo internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not lock data is executed after all stops (S528). That is, when the internal winning combination is the strong chance lip, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lock at the end of the game is executed by performing the stop operation in the push-up order for the additional lock.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S528 that the lock data after full stop is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes an AT times addition lottery process at lock after full stop (S529), and executes the lock command receiving process. finish. The sub CPU 81 also terminates the lock command reception processing when determining that the lock data is not executed after the entire stop (NO). In the post-all-stop lock time AT number addition lottery process, the sub CPU 81 determines, for example, the AT number addition value by lottery (for example, determines any of 100 to 500 as the AT number addition value), and determines the lottery result. It is added to the AT management difference number counter. In addition, the specific benefit given when the lock data is executed after the entire stop is not limited to this. For example, as a specific benefit, the control may be shifted to the above-mentioned additional state under the control of the sub CPU 81. Further, for example, as a specific benefit, the control may be shifted to the pseudo probability change state described above under the control of the main CPU 51, and a special value (for example, 10) may be set in the pseudo probability change state management counter.

<Processing when receiving a winning operation command>
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a winning operation command executed in step S413 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not an AT game is being performed (S540). If it is determined that the AT game is not being played (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the winning operation command receiving process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the AT game is being played (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the player is in an additional state (S541). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the vehicle is in the additional state (YES), the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command is ended. In the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the AT management difference number counter (see step S546 described later) is not executed in the additional state.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S541 that it is not in the additional state (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a BAR lip and a winning other than the first left stop (S542). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the BAR lip 1 or the BAR lip 2 is determined as the internal winning combination, and performs a first stop operation on a part other than the left reel 3L to determine whether any of the winning replays has been won. Determine whether or not. If the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is BAR lip and a winning other than the first left stop (YES), the additional status is set from the next game (S543), and the additional status management counter is initialized (S543). For example, 12) is set (S544), and the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command is ended.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S542 that the internal winning combination has not been won except for the BAR rip and the first left stop (NO), then the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the small winning combination has been won. (S545). When determining that the small winning combination has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination has been won (YES), the difference management number calculated from the number of payouts (see FIGS. 14A and 14B) -the number of insertions (for example, three) is used for AT management. The value is subtracted from the difference number counter (S546). In this embodiment, the difference number management in the AT game is realized in this manner.

  Note that the sub CPU 81 may determine in step S545 whether or not one of the bells has been won, instead of determining whether or not a small combination has been won. Specifically, any one of “middle left / right bell”, “middle right / left bell”, “right / left middle bell” and “right / middle left bell” which is the “push order small combination” as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not one of the bells has been won. If it is determined that the payout has actually been paid out, “7” is set as the payout number, and the process of step S546 is executed. It may be that. That is, the AT management difference number counter may be a counter that is updated by winning of the “push order small win”. With such a configuration, for example, in the AT game, between the player who performed the stop operation ignoring the notified stop operation order and the player who performed the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop operation order, Since there is a difference in the profits that can be obtained, it is possible to increase the tension of the game in the AT game and improve the interest of the game.

  The sub CPU 81 may execute the process of step S546 by executing the same determination as in step S238 of the in-AT state management process illustrated in FIG. Specifically, in step S545, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not one of the bells has been won, not whether or not the small role has been won. , The processing of step S546 may be executed. In the present embodiment, in S239 following the above-mentioned step S238, the AT game winning number counter is incremented by 1. When the AT game winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (for example, 38), the external signal 1 is turned off. (See FIG. 53). That is, with such a configuration, it is possible to synchronize the condition in which the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 fluctuates (for example, from the ON state to the OFF state) with the condition in the sub CPU 51 that the AT game ends. it can. In this case, it is desirable that the condition for starting the AT game in the sub CPU 51 be synchronized with the condition in which the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 fluctuates (for example, changes from off to on).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT management difference number counter is equal to or less than 0 (S547). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the difference number counter for AT management is not equal to or less than 0 (NO), the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command ends. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT management difference number counter is equal to or smaller than 0 (YES), it subsequently determines whether the AT point counter is equal to or greater than 4 (S548).

  If the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter during AT is 4 or more (YES), it adds 150 to the difference number counter for AT management (S549), subtracts 4 from the point counter during AT (S550), and wins a prize. The operation command reception process ends. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter during AT is not 4 or more (NO), the normal game is set from the next game, the determined mode and the number of ceiling games are set (S551), and a prize is won. The operation command reception process ends. In the present embodiment, the AT game is continued based on the AT midpoint in this way.

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the AT point counter is 4 or more is not limited to that executed at the end of the AT game. For example, in the processing at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. 69, a stock counter indicating that one set of the AT game is continued based on the fact that the point counter during the AT has become 4 (that is, the right to continue the AT game). Is incremented by one, and at the end of the AT game, it is determined whether or not this stock counter is 1 or more, and if the stock counter is 1 or more, control for continuing one set of the AT game may be performed. Good. In this case, instead of or together with the effect data for lighting and displaying the above-described arch cover 324, effect data for notifying that one set of the AT game is to be continued is set. May be notified that one set is continued.

[Another Embodiment of Pachislot Machine]
In the present embodiment, the special reel actions 1 to 4, the reel actions 1 to 14, or the pseudo game are adopted as the reel effects (effects in the symbol variation mode), but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, other embodiments can also be adopted as the reel effect (effect in the symbol variation mode). Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79, a description will be given of a reel effect (effect in a symbol variation mode) according to another embodiment. In the description of FIGS. 76 to 79, the description of the same contents as those already shown and described in FIGS. 1 to 75 will be omitted.

<Lock lottery process>
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42 in another embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes cherry lip A (S560). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether any of the cherry lip and the strong cherry lip (see FIG. 17) has been determined as the internal winning combination. When determining that the internal winning combination does not include the cherry lip A (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock lottery process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the internal winning combination includes cherry lip A (YES), the main CPU 51 sets a special reel action (S561), turns on a special control flag (S562), and ends the lock lottery process. I do. In step S561, the condition for setting the special reel action is not limited to the case where it is determined that the internal winning combination includes cherry lip A. For example, it is simply determined whether or not to execute the special reel action. A lottery may be performed, and the determination may be made based on the result of the lottery.

<Lock start processing at game start>
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in step S19 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42 in another embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a special reel action has been determined (S565). When the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action has not been determined (NO), the game start lock execution processing ends. On the other hand, when determining that the special reel action has been determined (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the left stop button is on (S565). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is pressed (pseudo stop operation) by the player and the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is on. When determining that the left stop button is not on (is off) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game start lock execution process. Here, for example, in the special reel action, each reel starts pseudo rotation by forward rotation in the same manner as normal rotation (that is, at the same or substantially the same rotation speed as normal rotation), and is used for an effect described later. This is a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts normal rotation as it is when the timer value becomes zero.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S566 that the left stop button is ON (YES), the main CPU 51 sets an effect timer corresponding to the pseudo stop start position (S567), and ends the game start lock execution process. I do. Here, the pseudo stop start position indicates a symbol position when the left stop button 17L is operated during execution of the special reel action (for example, symbol position data located at the middle stage of the left reel 3L).

  Also, setting the effect timer in accordance with the pseudo stop start position means that the pseudo stop start position is determined by the position where the "Cherry" symbol stops in the middle stage of the left reel 3L (the symbol position data is 12 and 17). Indicates that the effect timer is to be set according to whether the user is away. For example, when the value of the effect timer for one symbol is "17" (about 0.019 seconds), the position where the "Cherry" symbol stops and the pseudo stop start position are one symbol in the middle of the left reel 3L. If they are separated, "17" (about 0.019 seconds) is set as the value of the staging timer, and the position where the "Cherry" symbol stops and the pseudo stop start position in the middle of the left reel 3L is equivalent to 14 symbols. If it is away, “238 (17 × 14)” (about 0.266 seconds) is set as the value of the staging timer. Here, assuming that the value of the pulse counter required to move by one symbol (the symbol counter is incremented by 1) is “17”, that is, in the special reel action, the value of the effect timer is “ A value corresponding to an integral multiple of the time required to move by one symbol is set according to how many symbols the pseudo stop start position is separated from the position where the "cherry" symbol stops.

  In the other embodiments, the value of the effect timer is set according to how many symbols the pseudo stop start position is separated from the position at which the “cherry” symbol stops, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the value of the effect timer may be set according to the lottery. Specifically, the same lottery value is assigned to the symbol position data “0” to “19” to perform a lottery (for example, the lottery value “12” is assigned to each symbol position data, and 12 / One symbol position data is determined by lottery with a probability of 256. In addition, a lottery value “16”, which is a fraction of the lottery value when the lottery value “12” is assigned to each symbol position data, is re-designated. Re-lottery of the position data is performed.), The value of the effect timer according to the determined symbol position data (for example, a pseudo stop start position as viewed from the symbol position corresponding to the determined symbol position data as a result of the lottery) May be set according to how many symbols are separated from each other (the value of an effect timer at which the execution of the lock at the start of the game ends). In addition, the lottery of the symbol position at which the execution of the lock at the time of starting the game ends may be performed at the time of the start operation.

  In the other embodiments, the left reel 3L and the left stop button 17L are described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Similar processing may be executed on the reel 3C, the middle stop button 17R, or the right reel 3L, right stop button 17R, or the same processing may be executed on all of them.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. Note that the processing in steps S570 to S573 in FIG. 78 is the same as the processing in steps S330 to S333 in FIG. 56, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  The main CPU 51 determines whether or not the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (S574). When it is determined that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the input port check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special control flag is on and the effecting timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether the left stop button is on (S575). That is, the main CPU 51 turns on the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L based on the fact that the left stop button 17L has been pressed by the player during the execution of the special reel action. Based on the fact that the pressing operation is continued, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is kept on. When determining that the left stop button is not on (is off) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the input port check processing.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S575 that the left stop button is on (YES), it requests the output of a special on-edge signal (S576), and ends the input port check processing. Here, requesting the output of the special on-edge signal means that the on-edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is artificially output even when the left stop button 3L is kept pressed. Or a process of once turning off the on-edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L and then turning it on again.

  In the present embodiment, usually, after the processing of step S20 in FIG. 42, a stop operation on each reel is permitted based on the fact that each reel has rotated at a constant speed, and thereafter, an input port check is performed. In the processing, the execution of the stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is started based on the information of the on-edge being stored as the input data of the input port allocated to the stop switch 17S. On the other hand, in the other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, by performing the processing of step S576, even if the stop button is kept pressed, it is assigned to the stop switch 17S. On-edge information is stored as input data of the input port. Here, even when the stop button is kept depressed, the manner in which the on-edge information is stored as the input data of the input port allocated to the stop switch 17S is not limited to this. For example, at the timing when the stop operation on each reel is permitted, it is always monitored whether or not the stop switch 17S is on. If the stop switch 17S is on, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is executed. It may be started. In this case, the processing of steps S574 to S576 becomes unnecessary.

  As described above, in the other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, each reel starts pseudo rotation by forward rotation, and when a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, a specific symbol position (for example, The effect timer is set based on the symbol position where the "cherry" symbol stops at the middle stage and the pseudo stop start position (for example, the symbol position located at the middle stage when the pseudo stop operation is performed). When the value of the production timer becomes 0, a reel stop request signal (for example, a special on-edge signal) is output even when the player keeps pressing the stop button, and the reel is stopped at a specific symbol position. Will stop.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the other embodiments, the reel effect can be used to give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed. It can be improved.

  In addition, the combination of symbols related to cherry lip A is “Cherry-ANY-ANY”, but the player can easily hold the left stop button 17L during the special reel action by keeping the button pressed. The "cherry" symbol can be stopped in the middle of the left reel 3L. That is, since it is possible to easily detect that the specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed combination) has been established, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination is cherry lip or strong cherry lip, even if the combination of symbols related to cherry lip A is not stopped and displayed, the combination of symbols related to other replays is always stopped and displayed. (See FIGS. 17 and 19), so that the player does not suffer any particular disadvantage. Therefore, even if the "cherry" symbol can be easily stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 3L, the adjustment does not impair the fairness of the game.

<Direction of continuation of stop operation>
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a stop operation continuation suggestion effect according to another embodiment. Here, the stop operation continuation suggestion effect is, for example, a case where a special reel action is determined in the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49, and lock command data including that fact is generated, 57 shows an effect which is stored in the communication data storage area and executed by the sub CPU 81 under control when the lock command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in the communication data transmission processing shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 79, for example, when a special reel action is executed, the sub CPU 81 performs control so that an image “Press and hold the left stop button!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Thereafter, when the left stop button 3L is pseudo-stopped and the production timer becomes 0 while the left stop button 3L is kept depressed, the "Cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 3L. .

  As described above, in the other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, the notification that the pressing of the stop button based on the pseudo stop operation should be continued is performed. Based on this, it is possible to ensure that the player can enjoy an effect that can give an impression as if the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed. Further, when the formation of the specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed role) is a condition for executing the special reel action, the player is notified of the formation of the specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed combination) to the player. It can be surely enjoyed.

  As described above, according to the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination An internal lottery process), a symbol variation start control unit (for example, a reel rotation start process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, and a symbol display unit. Symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means. And profit providing means for providing a profit according to the combination of stopped symbols (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) An advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling a player to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game) which is advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on a predetermined start condition being satisfied. Notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, speakers 20L and 20R) for performing notification of a plurality of types of information to a player, and notification control for controlling notification performed by the notification means. Means (for example, a sub CPU 81), wherein the advantageous game state control means determines that at least a predetermined number of games have been played in a normal game state different from the advantageous game state (for example, in the normal game). , The ceiling game number has been exhausted) as the predetermined start condition, and the notification control means performs the game of a specific number of games in the normal game state. Each time (for example, 10 games) is performed, based on the number of games (for example, the number of remaining games) up to the predetermined number of games, a plurality of specific notification data (for example, the remaining game number suggesting effects 1 to 10). (Determination data corresponding to the above), one specific notification data is determined from the specified notification data, a notification corresponding to the determined specific notification data is executed by the notification unit, and the specific notification data is determined by the notification control unit. The specific notification data is determined at a different determination ratio for each range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games (for example, referring to the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. The production data corresponding to the suggested production is determined).

  According to this gaming machine, in a normal gaming state (for example, a normal game), each time a game of a specific number of games is performed, a notification (for example, a remaining game number suggestion effect) according to the specific notification data is executed. This makes it possible to add a new game property of estimating the number of remaining games until the game can be shifted to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and to reduce a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, as the number of games in the normal gaming state (for example, the normal game) increases, a notification (for example, a remaining game number suggestion effect) corresponding to a larger number of specific notification data is executed. Therefore, a player having a larger number of games can more accurately grasp the number of remaining games, thereby promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when estimating the number of remaining games until the game can be shifted to an advantageous gaming state (for example, an AT game), a notification corresponding to one specific notification data (for example, a remaining game number) In some cases, it can be estimated by executing the suggestion effect), and in other cases, it can be estimated by executing the notification in accordance with the specific notification data a plurality of times (for example, the remaining game number suggestion effect). It is possible to remarkably improve the interest of the player (for example, the effect of suggesting the number of remaining games).

  In addition, the plurality of specific notification data includes at least first specific notification data (for example, effect data corresponding to any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 3) and second specific notification data (for example, remaining game number). Effect data corresponding to number suggestion effect 4), third specific notification data (eg, effect data corresponding to remaining game number suggestion effect 5), and fourth specific notification data (eg, remaining game number suggestion effect 8 to 10). When the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is within a predetermined range (for example, when the number of remaining games is within 240 games). Only the first specific notification data is determined with a predetermined probability, and the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range, and the first range (for example, When the number of games is in the range of 101 to 240 games or the number of remaining games is in the range of 31 to 50 games), the second specific notification data is generated at a first probability (for example, a probability of 2000/32768). When the determination is made and the second range (for example, the number of remaining games is in the range of 51 to 100 games, or the number of remaining games is in the range of 11 to 30 games), the second probability lower than the first probability is determined. The second specific notification data is determined with a probability (for example, a probability of 100/32768), and the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range, and the second range When the third specific notification data is determined with the first probability, and when the third specific notification data is within the first range, the third specific notification data is determined with the second probability, The predetermined number of games When the range of the number of games to reach is outside the predetermined range (for example, the number of remaining games is 241 or more), a third probability lower than the first probability and higher than the second probability The second specific notification data or the third specific notification data is determined by (for example, a probability of 300/32768), and the range of the number of games until reaching the predetermined number of games is any range. , A fourth probability higher than the predetermined probability and the first probability (e.g., a probability of 10,000 / 32768, a probability of 9300/32768, a probability of 9000/32768, a probability of 10522/32768, or a probability of 10524/32768). A gaming machine, wherein the fourth specific notification data is determined by probability.

  According to this gaming machine, the determination of the specific notification data is complicated, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous in estimating the number of remaining games until the game can be shifted to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game). In addition, it is possible to make the playability more diverse.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a profit corresponding to a combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is provided. A game machine provided with a profit providing means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and a reporting means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, speakers 20L and 20R) for reporting information to a player. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a player's starting operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16), and The symbol change start control means (for example, the reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 51 and the reel control Processing) and a symbol change stop control unit (for example, a main unit) that stops the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on a player's stop operation (for example, an operation on the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R). The reel stop control process and the reel control process by the CPU 51 and the fact that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, “strong chance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and “special lip A1 to 6” or “special lip B” The game state is shifted from a normal game state (for example, “normal game state”) to a first game state (for example, “main CZ state 1”) based on the fact that any of the symbol combinations has been stopped. In the first gaming state, if a specific transition condition is satisfied during a specific number of games (for example, during eight games), the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. State (for example, “AT state”), and when the specific transition condition is not satisfied, a game state transition control unit () for transitioning the game state from the first game state to the normal game state ( For example, a state management process by the main CPU 51) and a main effect unit (for example, an effect by reel actions 1 to 8) in the first game state, in an effect according to a symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means (for example, A reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) and a lock executing unit (in the first game state) for executing a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player in accordance with an effect in a symbol variation mode performed by the main effect unit. For example, a main control means (for example, the main CPU 51) including a game start lock execution process by the main CPU 51) When the game state is controlled to the second game state by the game state transition control means, the sub-production means (for example, by the sub CPU 81) for notifying the information of the advantageous stop operation regarding the application of the game medium by the notification means Sub-control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) including a start command receiving process), wherein the specific transition condition is that an effect in a specific symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means (for example, reel action). 5 to 8 are executed).

  According to this gaming machine, by giving a privilege (for example, shifting to an AT game) in accordance with the type of the effect (for example, reel action) according to the symbol variation mode executed when the lock is executed, particularly, the lock game is executed. The expectation in the chance zone state (for example, “Main CZ state 1”) where the execution is easy can be remarkably improved.

  Further, in the first game state, the main rendering means determines the symbol variation mode based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means for each game (for example, during the normal game by the main CPU 51). The determination of the reel action in the lottery process) is performed, and the gaming state transition control unit determines that the specific symbol variation mode (for example, reel actions 5 to 8) is not determined by the main effect unit, and the predetermined symbol variation is performed. When the mode (for example, reel action 3 or 4) is determined, the game state is shifted to a high-probability first game state (for example, “Main CZ state 2”), and the main production means performs the high-probability In one game state, the specific symbol variation mode is determined with a higher probability than in the first game state (for example, the main CZ state reel by the main CPU 51). Gaming machine, characterized in that the lottery) by transfection lottery table.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the mode of the effect (for example, reel action) according to the symbol variation mode, and to produce the effect (the symbol variation mode) in which the privilege is given. For example, even when the reel actions 5 to 8 at which the AT game is started are not determined, in the chance zone state (for example, “Main CZ state 1” or “Main CZ state 2”) where the lock is easily executed. It is possible to prevent the expectation from lowering.

  In the effect in the symbol variation mode, the symbol is varied stepwise in a mode (for example, reverse rotation) different from the symbol variation started by the symbol variation start control means (for example, each reel is moved from one stage to The effect according to the specific symbol variation mode and the effect according to the predetermined symbol variation mode are different in the symbol variation stage (for example, five stages in reel actions 5 and 7 and reel A gaming machine characterized in that the reels are changed in six steps in actions 6 and 8, whereas the reels are changed in three steps in reel action 3 and four steps in reel action 4.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to gradually improve the player's expectation when the effect (for example, reel action) in the symbol variation mode is executed, and to intuitively determine the degree of advantage to the player. Can be grasped.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination An internal lottery process), a symbol variation start control unit (for example, a reel rotation start process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, and a symbol display unit. Symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means. And profit providing means for providing a profit according to the combination of stopped symbols (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) An advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling a player to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game) which is advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on a predetermined start condition being satisfied. And a point based on a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, one of Bell Lips 1 to 4) determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state. A number-of-points assigning means (for example, processing at the time of receiving a start command by the sub CPU 81), and a number-of-points storing means (for example, an AT point counter) for accumulating and storing the number of points given by the number-of-points assigning means. , Based on the fact that the number of points stored by the point number storage means has reached a predetermined number (for example, “4”), A continuation right granting means for granting a right to continue the gaming state (for example, the processing of S549 in the process of receiving a winning operation command under the control of the sub CPU 81), and a right to continue the advantageous gaming state is granted by the continuation right granting means. Point number updating means for subtracting the predetermined number from the point number stored by the point number storage means (for example, the processing of S550 in the winning operation command receiving control under the control of the sub CPU 81), The advantageous game state control means continues the advantageous game state by the continuation right granting means when the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less). If the right to play is given, until the predetermined end condition is satisfied again, the advantageous game In the case where the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the number of points less than the predetermined number is stored, the point number storage means controls the advantageous game state control means at least for the next time. A gaming machine characterized by carrying over a stored number of points until controlled to an advantageous gaming state.

  According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, any of Bell Lips 1 to 4) is determined during an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), a point (for example, an AT middle point) is obtained. When the awarded and stored number of points reaches a predetermined number of points (for example, 4 points), the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) is configured to continue, so during the advantageous game state (for example, AT game). It is possible to improve the interest of the game without the monotonous feeling of expectation of addition.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even when the stored points (for example, points during AT) are less than a predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), the points are changed to at least the next advantageous gaming state. (For example, AT game), it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game immediately after the advantageous game state ends, thereby contributing to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine. Become.

  Further, in the advantageous gaming state, the game apparatus further includes a point number notifying unit (for example, an arch cover 324 and a light emitting display unit 325 controlled by the sub CPU 81) for notifying the number of points stored in the point number storing unit. The point number notifying unit does not notify the point number in a game state other than the advantageous game state (for example, a normal game) when the point number is carried over by the point number storage unit (for example, A game machine that moves the movable part 309 from the production position to the initial position under the control of the CPU 81).

  According to this gaming machine, in a gaming state (for example, a normal game) other than an advantageous gaming state (for example, an AT game), a point carried over (for example, an AT middle point) is not notified. It is also possible for a player who starts a game from a normal game to play a game with a sense of expectation.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and normal game control means (for example, main CPU 51 and A sub CPU 81), normal game operation detecting means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting a normal game operation by a player in the normal game, and pseudo game control for controlling the progress of the pseudo game. Means (for example, the main CPU 51 and the sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detecting means for detecting a pseudo game operation by a player in the pseudo game, for example, a bet switch 15S, a start switch 16S, a stop switch 17S, and predetermined start conditions. Is established for a predetermined number of games based on the fact that Game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game) that is advantageous to the player, and the normal game operation detection means performs at least a start operation (for example, , An operation on the start lever 16) and a stop operation (e.g., an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), and the normal game control means can detect the start operation based on the detection of the start operation. A symbol variation start unit (for example, a reel rotation start process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, and an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation. (For example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51), and the stop operation is detected. Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the symbol variation stopping means (for example, a reel stop control process by the main CPU 51, Reel control processing), and when the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the symbol change stopping unit, the profit giving unit (for example, by the main CPU 51) that gives a profit corresponding to the combination of the stopped symbols. Medal payout processing) and, in the advantageous gaming state, a normal game addition determining means (for example, determining whether or not to add the predetermined number of games based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, , The processing of S474 in the processing during the pseudo probability changing state under the control of the sub CPU 81) and the normal processing in the advantageous gaming state. A lock determining unit (for example, a lottery process during a pseudo probable change state by the main CPU 51) for determining whether to execute a lock for invalidating a game operation for a predetermined period, and the lock determining unit determines the execution of the lock. Lock execution means (for example, game start lock execution processing by the main CPU 51) for executing the lock, and the pseudo game operation detection means executes the lock by the lock execution means. , It is possible to detect the pseudo game operation (for example, operation on the MAX bet button 15A, operation on the start lever 16, operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), and the pseudo game control means Determining the number of pseudo games when the lock is executed once by the lock execution means; In the step (for example, the lottery process in the pseudo probability changing state by the main CPU 51), and when the number of pseudo games determined by the pseudo game number determining means is not 0 (for example, the pseudo game number counter is not 0), the pseudo game operation is performed. Is determined on the basis of the detection of the internal internal winning combination (for example, a game start lock execution process by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state Pseudo game addition determining means for determining whether or not to add the predetermined number of games based on the pseudo internal winning combination determined by (for example, the process of S527 in the lock command reception process under the control of the sub CPU 81) and The pseudo game number determination means determines a plurality of pseudo game numbers (for example, a pseudo game number lottery Based on Buru, gaming machine, which is a pseudo-game number determination) possible.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and normal game control means (for example, main CPU 51 and A sub CPU 81), normal game operation detecting means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting a normal game operation by a player in the normal game, and pseudo game control for controlling the progress of the pseudo game. Means (for example, the main CPU 51 and the sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detecting means for detecting a pseudo game operation by a player in the pseudo game, for example, a bet switch 15S, a start switch 16S, a stop switch 17S, and predetermined start conditions. Is established for a predetermined number of games based on the fact that Game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game) that is advantageous to the player, and the normal game operation detection means performs at least a start operation (for example, , An operation on the start lever 16) and a stop operation (e.g., an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), and the normal game control means can detect the start operation based on the detection of the start operation. A symbol variation start unit (for example, a reel rotation start process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, and an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation. (For example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51), and the stop operation is detected. Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the symbol variation stopping means (for example, a reel stop control process by the main CPU 51, Reel control processing), and when the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the symbol change stopping unit, the profit giving unit (for example, by the main CPU 51) that gives a profit corresponding to the combination of the stopped symbols. Medal payout processing) and, in the advantageous gaming state, a normal game addition determining means (for example, determining whether or not to add the predetermined number of games based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, , The processing of S474 in the processing during the pseudo probability changing state under the control of the sub CPU 81) and the normal processing in the advantageous gaming state. A lock determining unit (for example, a lottery process during a pseudo probable change state by the main CPU 51) for determining whether to execute a lock for invalidating a game operation for a predetermined period, and the lock determining unit determines the execution of the lock. Lock execution means (for example, game start lock execution processing by the main CPU 51) for executing the lock, and the pseudo game operation detection means executes the lock by the lock execution means. , It is possible to detect the pseudo game operation (for example, operation on the MAX bet button 15A, operation on the start lever 16, operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), and the pseudo game control means Determining the number of pseudo games when the lock is executed once by the lock execution means; In the step (for example, the lottery process in the pseudo probability changing state by the main CPU 51), and when the pseudo game frequency determined by the pseudo game frequency determination means is not 0 (for example, the pseudo game frequency counter is not 0), the pseudo game operation is performed. Is determined on the basis of the detection of the internal winning combination (for example, a lock execution process at the start of the game by the main CPU 51), and the pseudo internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state Pseudo game addition determining means for determining whether or not to add the predetermined number of games based on the pseudo internal winning combination determined by (for example, the process of S527 in the lock command reception process under the control of the sub CPU 81) and , A first mode (for example, “pseudo probable change state 1”) and the pseudo game relatively relative to the first mode. The second mode in which the number of pseudo games determined by the number determining means is large (for example, “pseudo-probable change state 2”) is determined based on a predetermined transition condition (for example, whether or not the high-probability transition lottery is won). And a mode transition unit for making a transition to the second mode. The pseudo game number determination unit always decides a plurality of pseudo game times when the mode transition unit transitions to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  Further, the pseudo game operation detecting means detects at least a pseudo start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16) and a pseudo stop operation (for example, an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) as the pseudo game operation. It is possible that the pseudo internal winning combination determination means determines a pseudo internal winning combination based on the detection of the pseudo start operation, and the pseudo game control means determines that the pseudo operation has been detected. A pseudo symbol variation start unit (for example, a pseudo game process and a reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) for pseudo starting a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, and the pseudo stop operation is detected. Of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the pseudo internal winning combination determined by the pseudo internal winning combination determining means based on the Pseudo-pseudo symbol variation stopping means for stopping (e.g., pseudo-game process and the reel effect control process of the main CPU 51) a gaming machine, characterized in that a, further comprising a.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, during the pseudo probability changing state, the number of times of the advantageous gaming state based on the internal winning combination (for example, the number of ATs) is added, and not only the chance of the lottery, but also the advantageous gaming state based on the pseudo internal winning combination. An opportunity of additional lottery is also provided for the number of times (for example, the number of ATs), so that a plurality of additional lotteries can be expected during a single unit game, and the interest of the game related to the additional is improved. Can be.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, by using the pseudo game, for example, a plurality of lotteries can be generated in a time shorter than a specified time set in the gaming machine, for example, the pseudo probability change state It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the additional lottery state, which is advantageous to the player.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, in the second mode (for example, “pseudo-probable change state 2”), when the pseudo-game is executed, the number of pseudo-games is always plural (for example, two or more). Since it is determined, the number of times of the advantageous gaming state based on the pseudo internal winning combination (for example, the number of ATs) can be added and the chance of the lottery can be enjoyed a plurality of times. Additional lottery states can be diversified.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination An internal lottery process), a symbol variation start control unit (for example, a reel rotation start process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, and a symbol display unit. Symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means. And profit providing means for providing a profit according to the combination of stopped symbols (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) An advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling a player to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game) for a predetermined number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition; In the advantageous game state, the number-of-games management means for managing the predetermined number of games (for example, the management of the difference number counter for AT management by the sub CPU 81), and a specific start condition is satisfied in the advantageous game state ( For example, “BAR lip 1” or “BAR lip 2” is determined as an internal winning combination, and by performing a first stop operation on a part other than the left reel 3L, one of the winning replays is won and the added state is changed to “2”. Until the specific end condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining 10 games are consumed or the added state continues) based on the game completion. Additional game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling an additional game state (for example, an additional state), which is a game state for adding a predetermined number of games, and wherein the additional game number management means includes the additional game state. In, the predetermined number of games is not updated (for example, the process of S541 in the process of receiving a winning operation command under the control of the sub CPU 81), and the additional gaming state control means performs the identification in the additional gaming state. Until the end condition is satisfied, a point number determining means (for example, processing in the added state by the sub CPU 81) for determining the number of points for each game by lottery, and cumulatively storing the number of points determined by the point number determining means. The number of points to be stored (for example, a point counter in an added state); When the number of points equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, “100”) is stored, additional game number determining means (for example, processing during the additional state by the sub CPU 81) that determines the number of additional games to be added to the predetermined number of games ) And when the number of points equal to or more than the predetermined number is stored by the point number storage means, and when the specific end condition is satisfied, the additional game is performed until the specific end condition is satisfied again. Additional game state continuation means for continuing the state (for example, processing during the additional state by the sub CPU 81) and a case where the number of points exceeding the predetermined number is stored by the point number storage means, and the specific end condition is In the case of being established, in the additional gaming state continued by the additional gaming state continuation means, Gaming machine which comprises a number of points carryover means carried over Into number (e.g., the processing of S458 in the plus state processing by the control of the sub CPU 81), a.

  According to this gaming machine, the additional gaming state (for example, the additional state) functions as a state for increasing the number of advantageous gaming states (for example, the number of ATs), and also functions as, for example, a state for increasing medals. Therefore, in the additional game state, even if it is not possible to increase the number of advantageous game states, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by ensuring that the player enjoys the merit of increasing the medal. it can. Further, when the additional state is continued, points to be cumulatively added during the additional state (for example, points during the additional state) can be carried over, so that the lottery result in the additional state does not cause waste, It is possible to further improve the expectation of the lottery in the additional state.

  In addition, the specific end condition is that the point number storage unit stores the predetermined number or more of points, or that the point number storage unit does not store the predetermined number of points or more of a specific game. The number of games played has been performed, and the additional game number determining means determines the number of times in the additional gaming state that the number of points equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored by the point number storage means. A gaming machine, wherein the number of additional games is determined based on whether the game is a game (for example, an additional state management counter value).

  According to this gaming machine, in the added gaming state (for example, the added state), it is possible to prevent the additional lottery from being monotonous, and to maintain the interest of the game even when the additional added gaming state is repeatedly controlled. Can be.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a profit corresponding to a combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is provided. A game machine provided with a profit providing means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and a reporting means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, speakers 20L and 20R) for reporting information to a player. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a player's starting operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16), and The symbol change start control means (for example, the reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 51 and the reel control Processing) and a symbol change stop control unit (for example, a main unit) that stops the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on a player's stop operation (for example, an operation on the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R). The CPU 51 determines that a specific internal winning combination (for example, "Cherry Lip", "Strong Cherry Lip" or "Strong Bell") is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. An advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for shifting a game state from the next game from a normal game state (for example, a normal game) to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game) advantageous to a player; The specific internal winning combination includes a first specific internal winning combination (for example, “strong cherry lip”) and a second specific internal winning combination (for example, “Cherry ") When the first specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and when the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. In this case, if the predetermined lottery result is a winning (for example, if any of the special reel actions 2 to 4 is determined), the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game. (For example, execution of any of the special reel actions 2 to 4), and when the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the predetermined lottery result is not determined. In the case of a winning (for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined), in the next game, an effect according to the second symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the special reel action 1) (For example, reel effect control processing by the main CPU 51) and the internal winning combination determining means determines the specific internal winning combination, and the basic continuation in the advantageous gaming state is performed. A number of times (for example, 150 is added to the difference number counter for AT management), a basic continuation number of time giving means (for example, processing at the time of AT entry by the sub CPU 81), and the main effect means is used for the first symbol variation mode. A gaming machine comprising: an additional continuation number giving unit (for example, a process at the time of receiving a lock command by the sub CPU 81) for giving an addition continuation number in the advantageous gaming state based on the effect being performed.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a profit corresponding to a combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is provided. A game machine provided with a profit providing means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and a reporting means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, speakers 20L and 20R) for reporting information to a player. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a player's starting operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16), and The symbol change start control means (for example, the reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 51 and the reel control Processing) and a symbol change stop control unit (for example, a main unit) that stops the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on a player's stop operation (for example, an operation on the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R). The CPU 51 determines that a specific internal winning combination (for example, "Cherry Lip", "Strong Cherry Lip" or "Strong Bell") is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. An advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for shifting a game state from the next game from a normal game state (for example, a normal game) to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game) advantageous to a player; The specific internal winning combination includes a first specific internal winning combination (for example, “strong cherry lip”) and a second specific internal winning combination (for example, “Cherry ") When the first specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and when the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. In this case, if the predetermined lottery result is a winning (for example, if any of the special reel actions 2 to 4 is determined), the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game. (For example, execution of any of the special reel actions 2 to 4), and when the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the predetermined lottery result is not determined. In the case of a winning (for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined), in the next game, an effect according to the second symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the special reel action 1) (For example, a reel effect control process performed by the main CPU 51), and the effect in the first symbol variation mode or the effect in the second symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect module. A base continuation number providing means (for example, adding 150, 300, 400 or 500 to the AT management difference number counter) based on the base continuation number in the advantageous game state based on the base game; An addition continuation number providing means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for providing an addition continuation number in the advantageous game state based on the effect of the first symbol change mode being performed by the output means. A gaming machine wherein the number-of-times giving means gives a right to continue the advantageous gaming state.

  According to this gaming machine, the winning of the determined combination is not limited to simply generating an advantageous gaming state (for example, an AT game), but is based on a symbol variation mode executed in the next game based on the winning of the determined combination. When an effect (for example, special reel action) is performed and an effect (for example, any one of the special reel actions 2 to 4) according to the first symbol variation mode is performed, the number of additional continuations added to the number of basic continuations Is added, the expectation can be improved not only in the game that has been won or won in the fixed combination, but also in the next game.

  In addition, the symbol variation stop control means is configured to execute the stop operation at a predetermined timing when the internal win combination determination means determines the first specific internal win combination (for example, each reel). The timing at which the “BAR” symbol is stopped and displayed), and the case where the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing when the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. A game machine which stops changing symbols so that at least a part of symbols constituting a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means is different.

  According to this gaming machine, a player who wants to quickly recognize the type of the fixed combination is pressed at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the “BAR” symbol is stopped and displayed) on each reel, thereby changing the symbol variation mode. The type can be recognized before the effect is performed. On the other hand, a player who wants to recognize whether or not the addition is succeeded by the effect according to the symbol variation mode (that is, whether or not the number of additional continuations is given) is made to continue the sense of expectation by daringly not performing the above-mentioned eye-catching. You can play games. In other words, whether or not the addition is successful can be notified based on the notification mode and timing desired by the player, so that the notification of the addition can be performed according to the preference of the player.

  Further, the basic continuation number providing means determines and provides one of the basic continuation numbers of the plurality of the basic continuation numbers, and the addition continuation number providing means comprises one of the plurality of the addition continuation numbers. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of addition continuations is determined and given.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of basic continuations and the number of additional continuations to be given can be varied, and the number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) can be diversified.

  A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a profit corresponding to a combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is provided. A game machine provided with a profit providing means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and a reporting means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, speakers 20L and 20R) for reporting information to a player. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination based on a player's starting operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16), and The symbol change start control means (for example, the reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 51 and the reel control Processing) and a symbol change stop control unit (for example, a main unit) that stops the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on a player's stop operation (for example, an operation on the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R). A specific internal winning combination (for example, “strong chance lip”) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation is performed in a specific order (for example, The first change is performed by a left first stop), and a combination of symbols specific to the symbol display unit by the symbol variation stop control unit (for example, a combination of any of "special lip A1-6" or "special lip B") Is stopped, the game state is shifted from a normal game state (for example, “normal game state”) to a first game state (for example, “main CZ state 1”). In the first gaming state, when a specific transition condition is satisfied during a specific number of games (for example, during eight games), the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to a second gaming state (for example, If the specific transition condition is not satisfied, a game state transition control unit (for example, the main CPU 51) that transitions the gaming state from the first gaming state to the normal gaming state. State management processing), and in the first game state, a main effect means (for example, a reel by the main CPU 51) which performs an effect (for example, an effect by reel actions 1 to 8) according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means. Effect control processing) and, in the first game state, invalidating a game operation by a player according to an effect in a symbol variation mode performed by the main effect means. The specific internal winning combination is determined by a specific lock executing unit (for example, a game start lock executing process by the main CPU 51) for executing a specific lock, and the internal winning combination determining unit, and the stop operation is performed by a predetermined time. (For example, a push-on lock order), and based on the fact that a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “middle replay”) is stopped on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means, Lock execution means (for example, a lock execution process at the time of game termination by the main CPU 51) for executing a predetermined lock (for example, a lock based on lock data after all stops) for invalidating a game operation by a player. When the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state by (for example, the main CPU 51) and the gaming state transition control means. A sub-control unit (for example, a sub-CPU 81) including a sub-presentation unit (for example, a process at the time of receiving a start command by the sub-CPU 81) for notifying the information of the advantageous stop operation regarding the provision of the game medium by the notifying unit. The specific transition condition is that an effect in a specific symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means (for example, reel actions 5 to 8 are executed), and the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock execution means. Is executed, the specific profit different from the profit for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state (for example, the determination of the AT number addition value, the shift to the pseudo probability change state) is given to the player. A gaming machine further comprising providing means (for example, a sub CPU 81 and a main CPU 51).

  In the second game state, when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock executing means, the specific profit providing means may receive the information of the stop operation by the sub-production means as the specific profit. A gaming machine characterized by providing a benefit of increasing the number of times of notification (for example, determination of an AT number addition value under the control of the sub CPU 81).

  In addition, the specific profit giving means changes the gaming state from the second gaming state to the third gaming state as the specific profit when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock executing means in the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by providing a benefit of shifting to a gaming state (for example, shifting to an effect gaming state “pseudo-probable state” under the control of the main CPU 51).

  According to this gaming machine, in the chance zone state (for example, “Main CZ state 1”) in which the lock is easily executed, according to the type of the effect (for example, reel action) according to the symbol variation mode executed when the lock is executed. By shifting to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game), expectation can be remarkably improved.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when the transition to the chance zone state is not appropriate (for example, during the AT game or during the preparation for AT), a specific internal winning combination that triggers the transition to the chance zone state (for example, In the case of winning in "strong chance lip"), by not shifting to the chance zone state, it is possible to prevent the contents of the game from being obfuscated, and by giving different profits, to win a specific internal winning combination You can enjoy the benefits that you have.

  A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns; Reel control processing), when predetermined conditions are satisfied, reel effect determination means (for example, lock lottery processing by the main CPU 51) for determining the type of effect according to the symbol variation mode of the plurality of reels, and the symbols of the plurality of reels. A reel effect control means (for example, a reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) for controlling an effect (for example, a reel action) in a variation mode, wherein the reel effect control means determines the reel effect. Exciting output selection data corresponds to each of the plurality of reels according to the type of effect determined by the means. Reel effect selection data determining means (for example, the process of S276 in the reel effect control process under the control of the main CPU 51) for determining the reeled effect effect selection data, and the reel determined by the reel effect selection data determining means. Indicates the type of the excitation output table in which the rotation direction and the amount of rotation of the reel are determined based on the effect selection data, or indicates that at least the effect symbol position, which is the symbol position for starting the effect on the reel, should be adjusted. Excitation output selection data determining means for determining the type of the symbol position adjustment data as excitation output selection data (for example, the process of S277 in the reel effect control processing under the control of the main CPU 51) and the excitation output selection data determining means , The symbol position adjustment data as the excitation output selection data If determined, includes effect symbol position adjusting means for adjusting the effect symbol position (for example, reel effect adjustment output processing by the main CPU 51), and the effect symbol position adjusting means includes: (For example, the process of S294, the process of S297, the process of S300, and the process of S308 in the reel effect adjustment output process under the control of the main CPU 51 are executed). A gaming machine that adjusts the effect symbol position.

  According to this gaming machine, when the excitation output table is determined as the excitation output selection data, the excitation output control is performed using the excitation output table, and the symbol position adjustment data is determined as the excitation output selection data. If it is determined that the excitation output table is selected in accordance with the type of the symbol position adjustment data and the effect symbol position and the excitation output control is performed using the selected excitation output table, for example, The symbol position of the reel can be adjusted only when it is desired to perform an effect in the reel symbol variation mode in a state where the symbols (for example, the “red 7” symbol) are aligned, so that the effect starts in the reel symbol variation mode. Even if there is a shift in the symbol position of the reels during the performance in front or during the reel variation mode, the shift is adjusted without increasing the control burden Te, it is possible to enjoy the effects by symbol variation aspect of intended reels to the player.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination An internal lottery process), a symbol variation start control unit (for example, a reel rotation start process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, and a symbol display unit. Symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means. And profit providing means for providing a profit according to the combination of stopped symbols (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) An advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling a player to an advantageous game state (for example, an AT game) which is advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on a predetermined start condition being satisfied. And controlling the start and end of the output of a first external signal (for example, the external signal 2) indicating that the state has been controlled to the advantageous game state by the advantageous game state control means. External signal output control means (for example, external signal output management processing by the main CPU 51) for controlling start and end of output of a second external signal (for example, external signal 1) indicating that the advantageous gaming state has continued; And the external signal output control means is configured to determine when a predetermined output start condition is satisfied (for example, when the number-of-winning-times counter in a normal game has become three). The output of the first external signal is started, and based on the fact that only the first external signal is output in a unit game different from the unit game that started outputting the first external signal When the output of the second external signal is started and the first external signal and the second external signal are output, a specific output termination condition is satisfied (for example, a winning during an AT game). The output of the second external signal alone is terminated based on the fact that the number-of-times counter has reached a predetermined value, and when the first external signal and the second external signal have been output, a predetermined A gaming machine, wherein the output of the first external signal and the output of the second external signal is terminated based on a condition that an output termination condition is satisfied (for example, when an AT termination counter becomes 2).

  According to this gaming machine, the first external signal (for example, the external signal 2) indicating that the game has been controlled to the advantageous game state (for example, the AT game) and the advantageous game state (for example, the AT game) have been continued. And the second external signal (for example, the external signal 1) is output, so that the number of initial hits and the number of continuations of the advantageous game state of interest to the player are appropriately displayed on an external display or the like. be able to.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the first external signal (for example, the external signal 2) indicating that the gaming machine has been controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT game) and the advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT game) continue. With a simple configuration, the second external signal (for example, external signal 1) indicating that the external display has been performed is output at different timings, so that the control load on the external display side can be reduced and communication errors and the like can be reduced. Can also be reduced.

  Further, the predetermined output start condition is a condition that is established later than the predetermined start condition (for example, the start of the AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81), and the specific output end condition is the predetermined output end condition. A game machine characterized in that the condition is established later than the end condition (for example, the end of the AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81).

  According to this gaming machine, the start and the end of the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) are notified by the notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like) controlled by the sub-control circuit rather than the display by the external display or the like. Since the notification can promptly notify the player, the convenience of the player playing the game can be improved.

  Further, a difference number management means (for example, an AT management difference number counter) for managing the difference number in the advantageous game state, and a prize number management means (for example, AT And the predetermined termination condition is that the difference number managed by the difference number management means has reached a predetermined number (for example, 0 or less), and the specific output A gaming machine wherein the end condition is that the number of winnings managed by the winning number managing means has reached a predetermined number (for example, 38).

  According to this gaming machine, in particular, the number of AT game continuations (one set) can be appropriately displayed with a simple configuration.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a player's start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16). Internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination, and a symbol variation start control for starting a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation. Symbols (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on a player's stop operation (for example, an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R). Symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, A profit providing means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) for providing a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols when the change of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the stop control means. The internal winning combination is such that when the stop operation is performed in a first stop operation order (for example, “middle left and right”), a first symbol combination (for example, the pressing order is correct and the right answer rises to seven) Are displayed on the symbol display means, and a first internal winning combination (for example, middle left and right bell A) and the stop operation are performed in a second stop operation order (for example, “right and left middle”). In this case, a second symbol combination (for example, middle right bell B) and a second symbol combination (for example, the middle seven rows of the correct answer in the pressing order) to be displayed on the symbol display means, The operation is performed in the first stop operation sequence. In this case, a third combination of symbols (for example, the lower seven pieces of the correct answer in the pressing order) to be displayed on the symbol display means (for example, middle left and right bells C) and the stop operation A fourth internal winning combination (for example, right and left middle bell C) in which a third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means when performed in the second stop operation order; The internal winning combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination and the second internal winning combination as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, a coefficient “750”). The third internal winning combination and the fourth internal winning combination are determined as internal winning combinations with a second probability (for example, a coefficient “250”) lower than the first probability. The combination of the first symbol, the combination of the second symbol, and the combination of the third symbol are A gaming machine characterized in that when displayed on the symbol display means, a predetermined profit (for example, payout of seven medals) which is the same profit is provided.

  In addition, the first internal winning combination is that when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation sequence different from the first stop operation sequence (for example, “middle right and left”), the timing of the stop operation is determined. Accordingly, one of a plurality of fourth symbol combinations (for example, one press position correct answer) is an internal winning combination which is displayed on the symbol display means, and the second internal winning combination is When the stop operation is performed in a stop operation sequence (for example, “middle left and right”) different from the second stop operation sequence, a plurality of the fourth symbols are provided according to the timing of the stop operation. Any of the combinations (for example, one press position correct answer) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the third internal winning combination is that the stop operation is performed by the first operation. The stop operation sequence is different from the stop operation sequence In this case, irrespective of the timing of the stop operation, any one of a plurality of combinations of the fourth symbols (for example, one unquestioned one) is an internal winning combination that is displayed on the symbol display means, The fourth internal winning combination includes, when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation sequence different from the second stop operation sequence, a plurality of the fourth symbols, regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Is an internal winning combination that is to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the profit giving means determines that the fourth symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized by giving a specific profit (for example, paying out one medal) smaller than the predetermined profit when displayed.

  According to this gaming machine, even when a plurality of small pressing order combinations are defined, it is possible to prevent a monotonous appearance (combination of displayed symbols) when the stop operation sequence is correct. .

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even when a plurality of small pressing orders are defined, the number of internal winning combinations is reduced, thereby reducing the data capacity and reducing the control load of the internal lottery process. be able to.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even when a plurality of small pressing orders are defined, the number of internal winning combinations is reduced, so that it becomes easier to uniformly assign a desired lottery value. This also contributes to ease of design and ease of design.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and start operation detection means (for example, a start switch) for detecting a start operation by a player 16S), a stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player (for example, a stop switch 17S), and an internal determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation being detected by the start operation detecting means. A symbol variation that starts a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on a winning combination determination unit (for example, an internal lottery process performed by the main CPU 51) and a start operation detected by the start operation detection unit. Start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation detection means Symbol fluctuation stop control for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means within a range of a predetermined maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, four symbols) based on the detection of the stop operation. Means (for example, a reel stop control process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51), and that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, that either a cherry lip or a strong cherry lip is determined as an internal winning combination) On the basis of this, the main effect means (for example, the main CPU 51) for performing an effect (for example, a special reel action) in the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means, and the effect in the symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means. A lock start unit (for example, main CPU 51) for starting a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player; The lock is started by a step, and based on the stop operation being detected by the stop operation detecting means, a lock period determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 77 by the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. 77 by the main CPU 51) determines a lock period in which the lock continues. A lock execution process at the start of a game) and lock ending means (for example, a main CPU 51) for ending the lock based on the elapse of the lock period determined by the lock period determination means. The fluctuation stop control unit may be configured to detect the stop operation by the stop operation detection unit when the lock period is determined by the lock period determination unit and continue until the lock is ended by the lock end unit. Even when the lock is ended by the lock end means (for example, the step shown in FIG. 78) In S574, it is determined that the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means based on the fact that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (for example, step S576 in FIG. 78). Wherein the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped based on a request for outputting a special on-edge signal).

  In addition, the lock period determination unit is configured to lock the lock based on a symbol position (for example, a pseudo stop start position) displayed on the symbol display unit when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection unit. A gaming machine characterized by determining a period.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and start operation detection means (for example, a start switch) for detecting a start operation by a player 16S), a stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player (for example, a stop switch 17S), and an internal determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation being detected by the start operation detecting means. A symbol variation that starts a variation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit based on a winning combination determination unit (for example, an internal lottery process performed by the main CPU 51) and a start operation detected by the start operation detection unit. Start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation detection means Symbol fluctuation stop control for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means within a range of a predetermined maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, four symbols) based on the detection of the stop operation. Means (for example, a reel stop control process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51), and that a specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, cherry lip or strong cherry lip as the internal winning combination). Is determined), the main effect means (for example, the main CPU 51) for performing an effect (for example, a special reel action) in the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means, and the main effect means. By the way, when the effect in the symbol variation mode is performed, a lock start means (for example, a lock start means for starting a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player) A specific combination of symbols related to the specific internal winning combination based on that the lock is started by the lock start unit and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection unit. When a symbol (for example, a "cherry" symbol) is displayed on the symbol display means (for example, symbol positions where the symbol position data is 12 and 17) and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means The lock period determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 77 by the main CPU 51) determines the lock period in which the lock is continued in accordance with the symbol position (for example, the pseudo stop start position) displayed on the symbol display means. Game start lock execution processing) and the lock period determined by the lock period determination means has elapsed. Lock ending means (for example, main CPU 51) for ending the lock, and the symbol variation stop control means is configured to control the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means when the lock period is determined by the lock period determining means. Is detected until the lock is terminated by the lock termination unit, the lock is terminated by the lock termination unit (for example, in step S574 of FIG. 78, the special control flag It is determined that the stop operation has been detected by the stop operation detecting means based on the ON state and the effect timer is set to 0 (for example, in step S576 in FIG. 78, the output of the special on-edge signal is performed). The specific symbol is displayed at the symbol position displayed on the symbol display means. Gaming machine, characterized in that stop variation.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give an impression to the player as if the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed by using an effect (for example, a special reel action) according to the symbol variation mode. Even when the number of frames is determined to be four, it is possible to significantly improve the interest in the stop operation.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, a combination of symbols relating to a specific internal winning combination (for example, cherry lip or strong cherry lip) (for example, a combination of symbols relating to cherry lip A, "Cherry-ANY-ANY") is used. Since the constituent symbols (for example, the “cherry” symbol on the reel 3L) can be easily stopped, the player can easily detect that a specific internal winning combination has been established, and It is possible to significantly improve the interest of the people.

  In addition, a stop operation continuation suggestion effect notifying that the stop operation should be continued based on the effect of the symbol variation mode being performed by the main effect means (for example, a stop operation continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 79) (For example, the liquid crystal display device 11).

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to surely enjoy an effect (for example, a special reel action) in a symbol variation mode that can give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed.

  The present embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, the specific configuration of each unit included in the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the example adopted in the above-described embodiment, and may be arbitrarily modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are adopted as the symbol display means, but a liquid crystal display device is used instead or together with this. It may be. That is, the image of the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be changed and displayed. In addition, the display window may be a single display window 4, and the display window 4 may display a part of the symbols arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3 </ b> L, 3 </ b> C, and 3 </ b> R.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the internal winning combination determining means, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value generated by the random number generator 56 and performs the internal lottery processing. Alternatively, a random number value may be obtained using a random number generation circuit (not shown) built in the main CPU 51.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, a start switch 16S that detects an operation on the start lever 16 is employed as a start operation detection unit that detects a start operation of the player, and a stop switch that detects a stop operation of the player is used. As the operation detecting means, the stop switch 17S for detecting an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is employed, but a touch panel switch may be used instead or together with the stop switch 17S.

  Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 51 or the sub CPU 81 shown in the present embodiment may appropriately change the management mode without departing from the gist of the present invention. be able to. For example, various counters and various timers managed by “addition” may be managed by “subtraction”. In this case, the determination as to whether or not “more than” is “less than or equal to” The determination as to whether or not "is greater than" is interpreted as the determination as to whether or not "is greater than". Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by “subtraction” may be managed by “addition”. In this case, the determination as to whether or not “not more than” It should be read as the judgment as to whether or not "is above", and the judgment as to whether or not "below" is to be read as the judgment as to whether or not "is more than."

  Further, for example, various counters managed under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in the present embodiment may be managed under the control of the sub CPU 81 without departing from the spirit of the present invention. The various counters managed by the control of (1) may be managed by the control of the main CPU 51 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Further, for example, various game states managed by the control of the main CPU 51 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 81 without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Various game states managed under the control of the CPU 81 may be managed under the control of the main CPU 51 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Note that all the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. it can.

1 Pachislot machine 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4L, 4C, 4R Display window 16 Start lever 16S Start switch 17L, 17C, 17R Stop button 17S Stop switch 41 Main control circuit 42 Sub-control circuit 51 Main CPU
53 Main RAM
81 Sub CPU
83 Sub RAM

Claims (3)

Symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player;
Stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Based on the detection of the start operation, a symbol variation start means for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation;
Based on the detection of the stop operation, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a symbol variation stopping means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means,
When the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the symbol change stopping unit, a profit giving unit that gives a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols,
Advantageous game state control means for controlling to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition;
A continuation right granting means for granting a right to continue the advantageous gaming state when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state,
In the advantageous gaming state, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, a specific symbol combination is displayed, and the profit providing means determines that a specific number of game media are paid out. Is a gaming state in which the information of the stop operation to be provided with the profit of
The first combination is an internal winning combination in which the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed, but the specific benefit is not provided by the benefit providing means and a replay benefit is provided,
A stop operation for displaying the combination of the specific symbols when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means in the advantageous gaming state and when the advantageous gaming state is not the predetermined state. A gaming machine characterized in that information of the game can be notified. When the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state, and when the advantageous gaming state is the predetermined state, the specific symbol combination is not displayed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein information on a stop operation can be notified. The internal winning combination determining means can further determine a third winning combination as an internal winning combination,
The continuation right granting means does not allow granting the right to continue the advantageous gaming state when the third winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means,
The third combination is an internal winning combination in which the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed, but the specific benefit is not provided by the benefit providing means and a replay benefit is provided. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images